Panasonic | DMRES35V | Operating instructions | Panasonic DMRES35V Operating Instructions

2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Operating Instructions
Convenient
functions
Transferring
(Copying)
Editing
Playing back
Recording
DVD Recorder
Model No. DMR-ES35V
Getting started
M6VP&PC.book 1 ページ
Dear Customer
Reference
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum performance
and safety, please read these instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read
the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
Region numbers are allocated to DVD players and DVD-Video
according to where they are sold.
≥The region number of this unit is “1”.
≥The unit will play DVDs marked with labels containing “1” or
“ALL”.
Example:
1
P PC
ALL
1
2
4
If you have any questions contact
In the U.S.A: 1-800-211-PANA(7262)
In Canada:
1-800-561-5505
]For]U.S.A.]only]
The warranty can be found on page 69.
Español
Region number supported by this unit
]For]Canada]only]
The warranty can be found on page 70.
La guía rápida en español se encuentra en la página 71–78.
RQTV0134 -2
M6VP&PC.book 2 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY IN THE U.S.A.
CAUTION!
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN
MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC
SHOCK OR PRODUCT DAMAGE, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN,
MOISTURE, DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND
THAT NO OBJECTS FILLED WITH LIQUIDS,
SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE PLACED ON THE
APPARATUS.
CAUTION!
DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,
BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.
ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO
OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY OTHER
MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE VENTILATION VENTS.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE SCREWS.
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within
an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the
user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may
be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
-If you see this symbolInformation on Disposal in other Countries outside the
European Union
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your
local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct
method of disposal.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s
attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for
proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable
ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the
building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.
The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and
easily accessible. The mains plug of the power supply cord shall
remain readily operable. To completely disconnect this
apparatus from the AC Mains, disconnect the power supply cord
plug from AC receptacle.
THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY IN THE U.S.A.
FCC Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
≥Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
≥Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
≥Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
≥Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for
help.
FCC Caution: To assure continued compliance, follow the
attached installation instructions and use only shielded interface
cables when connecting to peripheral devices.
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate this equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Responsible Party:
Panasonic Corporation of North America
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ, 07094
Telephone No.: 1-800-211-7262
(Inside of product)
2
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 3 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS/Unit care
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read these operating instructions carefully before using the unit. Follow the safety instructions on the unit and the applicable safety instructions
listed below. Keep these operating instructions handy for future reference.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.
(8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat
registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
(9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or groundingtype plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than
the other. A grounding-type plug has two blades and a third
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided
for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet,
consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
(10)Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
(11)Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
(12)Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or
table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with
the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution
when moving the cart/apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
(13)Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
(14)Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is
required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been
spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus
has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.
Unit care
The precision parts in the unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
To clean the unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, thinner or benzine to clean the unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
The heat can damage the unit.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, possibly
making it impossible to record or play discs.
Use the DVD lens cleaner about once every year, depending on
frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
∫ Cautions as to condensation
Condensation can cause unreliable playback of VHS recordings.
Condensation may form in the following cases,
≥The unit is brought from cold surroundings into a well-heated room.
≥The unit is suddenly brought from cool surroundings, such as an
air-conditioned room or car, to a place which is hot and humid.
≥During the rainy season.
In any of the above-mentioned conditions, do not operate the unit for
at least 2 hours. The unit is not equipped with a dew sensor.
Lens cleaner: RP-CL720PP
∫ Other precautions for installation
≥The unit should not be installed or operated near large magnets or
electromagnetic devices. Such devices can damage pre-recorded
VHS recordings.
≥Do not place any heavy objects atop the unit, and do not install it in
a confined space. Please allow for adequate air circulation.
≥The unit should not be mounted in a vertical position. It’s designed
to operate in the horizontal position.
∫ When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household AC outlet. The unit consumes a small amount of power even when it is turned off.
Standby power consumption
FL Display (l 58)
Quick Start (l 56)
Automatic
Bright
On
Approx. 7 W
Approx. 8 W
Off
Approx. 3 W
Approx. 3.2 W
∫ Quick Start (l 56)
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording on DVD-RAM°
° From the power off state, recording on DVD-RAM starts about 1 second after first pressing the [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] and then sequentially
pressing the [¥, REC] (Quick Start Mode).
3
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 4 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Table of contents
Getting started
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Discs you can use for recording and play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Discs that cannot be played . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Concerning logo marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Using DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL and
+RW on this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
The remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Disc handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Video cassette information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Useful features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
The unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Connection with a television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Connection with a television and
cable box or satellite receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
If the antenna connector doesn’t match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
DVD output and DVD/VHS output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
To enjoy higher picture quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
≥ Connecting to the TV S VIDEO IN terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
≥ Connecting to the TV COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals . . 15
Connecting an amplifier or system component . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
STEP 2 Plug-in Auto Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
≥ Restart Plug-in Auto Tuning
(after relocation, for example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
≥ Restart Set Channels Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
≥ Adding and deleting channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
≥ Set Clock Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Other settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Channel captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
≥ Preset Channel Captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
≥ Manual Channel Captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Selecting television type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
When other Panasonic products respond to
this remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
≥ Set Clock Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
≥ Adjust Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Removing Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Recording
Recording television programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Inserting discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Inserting a video cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Recording procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
≥ Recording modes and
approximate recording times (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
≥ Recording modes (VHS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
≥ Off Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
≥ When the format confirmation screen is displayed . . . . . . . 25
≥ When remove a recorded disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
To specify a time to stop recording
–One Touch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Selecting audio to record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Auto Bilingual Choice Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Playing DVD while recording VHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Playing VHS while recording DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Watching the TV while recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
≥ Playing from the beginning of the title you are recording
–Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
≥ Playing a title previously recorded while recording
–Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Flexible Recording
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space) . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4
RQTV0134
Scheduled Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Cautions for using scheduled recording on
DVD and VHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Programming scheduled recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
≥ Cancel scheduled recording that has already begun . . . . . .29
≥ Release program from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
≥ Auto SP/EP mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
≥ Check, change or delete programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Playing back
Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
≥ When a menu screen appears on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Selecting recorded titles to play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Quick View (Play t1.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Fast forward and rewind– SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Skipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Slow-motion play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Frame-by-frame viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Direct play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
CM Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Create chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Skipping the specified time — Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Using menus to play MP3 and
still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Playing discs which contain both MP3 and
still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Playing MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
≥ Using the tree screen to find a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
To show Pictures Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Playing still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
≥ Start Slideshow/Slideshow Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
≥ To select the still pictures in another folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Playing a video cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Fast-forward/Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Cue/Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Jet Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Slow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Jet Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
S-VHS Quasi Playback (SQPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Repeat Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Adjusting the playback picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
≥ Manual tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
≥ Vertical locking adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
VHS Index Search System (VISS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Various on-screen display indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Using on-screen menus/FUNCTIONS window and
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
≥ Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
- Disc menu–Setting disc content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
- Play menu–Change play sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
- Video menu–Change picture quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
- Audio menu–Change sound effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
- Other menu–Change the display position . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
FUNCTIONS window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Editing
Convenient functions
Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Editing titles/Chapters and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Title operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥ Delete Title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥ Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥ Edit Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Title Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Set Protection/Cancel Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Shorten Title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Change Thumbnail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥ View Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Delete Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Create Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Combine Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- View Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
38
38
38
39
39
39
39
39
39
40
40
40
40
40
40
Creating, editing and playing playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Creating playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing playlists/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playlist operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥ Delete Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥ Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥ Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Playlist Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Change Thumbnail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥ View Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Add Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Move Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Create Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Combine Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Delete Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- View Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
41
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
Transferring (Copying)
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Deleting title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Selecting recorded titles to delete
–Delete Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Deleting title during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
DVD Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Providing a disc with a name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting all titles and playlists–Delete All Titles . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting all contents of a disc–Format Disc ( DVD ) . . . . . . . .
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
–Playback will start with: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment
–Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling the second layer on DL (dual-or double-layer
on single side) discs to be recordable
–Close First Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Top Menu
–Create DVD Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
53
53
54
Table of contents/Accessories
M6VP&PC.book 5 ページ
54
55
55
55
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Entering a password (Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Summary of settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Reference
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limited Warranty (ONLY FOR U.S.A.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limited Warranty (ONLY FOR CANADA) . . . . . . . . . . .
59
60
61
66
67
68
69
70
Referencia rápida en español. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
(Spanish Quick Reference)
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Transferring (Copying) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Before transferring (copying) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer (Copying) from VHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥ One Touch Transfer (Copying) (VHS l DVD) . . . . . . . . . . .
≥ GUI (Graphical User Interface) Transfer (Copying) . . . . . . .
Transfer (Copying) from DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
≥ One Touch Transfer (Copying) (DVD l VHS) . . . . . . . . . . .
≥ GUI (Graphical User Interface) Transfer (Copying) . . . . . . .
≥ Transfer (Copying) a DVD-Video, finalized DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, or +R DL . . .
Recording from an external device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DV camcorder recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
45
45
46
47
47
48
∫ About descriptions in these operating
instructions
≥Pages to be referred to are indicated as (l ±±).
49
50
50
Accessories
Please check and identify the supplied accessories. Use numbers indicated in parentheses when asking for replacement parts.
(Product numbers correct as of January 2006. These may be subject to change.)
Only for U.S.A.: To order accessories, refer to “Accessory Purchases” on page 69.
Only for Canada: To order accessories, call the dealer from whom you have made your purchase.
∏ 1 AC power supply cord
(VFA0461)
≥For use with the unit only. Do not ∏ 1 75 ≠ coaxial cable
use it with other equipment.
(K2KZ2BA00001)
Also, do not use cords belonging
to other equipment with the unit.
∏ 1 Remote control
(EUR7659Y70)
∏ 2 Batteries for the remote
control
R6 size
∏ 1 Audio/Video cable
(K2KA6BA00003)
(U.S.A. only)
Product Registration Card
Please complete and return the
included product registration card,
or register via the Internet at:
http://www.prodreg.com/
panasonic/
∏ 1 DVD-RAM
5
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 6 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Disc information
Discs you can use for recording and play
Disc type
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
≥4.7 GB/9.4 GB, ≥4.7 GB, 12 cm (5z)
≥1.4 GB, 8 cm (3z)
12 cm (5z)
≥2.8 GB, 8 cm
(3z)
DVD-RW
DVD-R DL°1
rR°2
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm (5z) ≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
(dual layer on
≥1.4 GB, 8 cm (3z)
single side)
(5z)
≥8.5 GB, 12 cm (5z)
+RW
+R DL°1
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
(double layer
(5z)
on single side)
≥8.5 GB, 12 cm
(5z)
Logo
–
Indicated in
these
instructions
with
[RAM]
Recording format
(l below)
Main use °3
[-R] before
finalization
[-RW‹V›] before
finalization
[+R] before
finalization
–
[+R]DL] before
finalization
[+RW]
[DVD-V]
[DVD-V]
[DVD-V]
[DVD-V]
[DVD-V]
after finalization after finalization after finalization after finalization after finalization
VR
Re-writable
discs
[-R]DL] before
finalization
–
DVD-Video
DVD-Video
DVD-Video
+VR
+VR
+VR
One time
recording discs
(recordable until
the disc is full)
One time
Re-writable
recording discs discs
(recordable until
the disc is full)
One time
recording discs
(recordable until
the disc is full)
One time
Re-writable
recording discs discs
(recordable until
the disc is full)
Up to 16x
Up to 4x
Up to 6x
Up to 16x
Up to 2.4x
Up to 4x °5
Only after
finalizing the
disc°6. (l 55,
68)
Only after
finalizing the
disc. (l 55, 68)
Only after
finalizing the
disc. (l 55, 68)
Only after
finalizing the
disc. (l 55, 68)
Yes. It is not
necessary to
finalize the disc.
(l 68)
Compatibility
Usable high
Up to 5x
speed
recording disc °4
Play on other
player
Only on DVD-RAM Only after
compatible players. finalizing the
It is not necessary disc. (l 55, 68)
to finalize the disc.
(l 68)
What you can do on this unit (Y: Possible, t: Impossible)
Chasing playback Y
t
t
t
t
t
t
Recording
Y °7
broadcasts that
allow one copy
t
t
t
t
t
t
Recording both Y
Main and SAP
of MTS
broadcast
t (Only one is
recorded. l 57,
Multi-channel TV
sound (MTS))
t (Only one is
recorded. l 57,
Multi-channel TV
sound (MTS))
t (Only one is
recorded. l 57,
Multi-channel TV
sound (MTS))
t (Only one is
recorded. l 57,
Multi-channel TV
sound (MTS))
t (Only one is
recorded. l 57,
Multi-channel TV
sound (MTS))
t (Only one is
recorded. l 57,
Multi-channel TV
sound (MTS))
Recording 16:9 Y
aspect picture
t (The picture is t (The picture is t (The picture is t (The picture is t (The picture is t (The picture is
recorded in 4:3 recorded in 4:3 recorded in 4:3 recorded in 4:3 recorded in 4:3 recorded in 4:3
aspect.)
aspect.)
aspect.)
aspect.)
aspect.)
aspect.)
Entering text
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Erasing titles
Y
Y (Available
space does not
increase after
deleting.)
Y (Available
space does not
increase after
deleting.)
Y (Available
disc space
increases when
the last recorded
title is deleted.) °8
Y (Available
space does not
increase after
deleting.)
Y (Available
space does not
increase after
deleting.)
Y (Available
disc space
increases when
the last recorded
title is deleted.) °8
t
t
t
t
t
t
Creating playlists Y
°1
You can record onto the second layer of dual- or double-layer discs after closing the first layer (l 55). You will no longer be able to record to
the first layer after you do this (l 8).
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.
°2 You may not be able to use +R recorded on this unit in another Panasonic DVD recorder and vice versa. Once the disc is finalized, however,
it can be played in the other unit.
°3 The amount of the recordable disc space doesn’t increase even if the program is deleted when you use a one time recording disc.
°4 This unit can use the high-speed recording discs shown in the chart, but using them will not shorten the recording time.
°5 You can play 8x recording speed discs recorded on another equipment.
°6 Play on DVD-R DL compatible equipment.
°7 CPRM (l 68) compatible discs only
°8 The recording space may increase slightly when other titles are deleted.
≥The explanations concerning discs are indicated by [DVD], and those concerning video are indicated by [VHS].
≥We recommend using Panasonic discs. We recommend using DVD-RAM discs with cartridges to protect them from scratches and dirt.
≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.
≥You cannot record programs that allow “One time only recording” to CPRM compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL and DVD-RW on this unit. You can
record other programs as DVD-Video format.
≥For the recording time, refer to “Recording modes and approximate recording times (DVD)” on page 24.
6
RQTV0134
∫ DVD Video Recording format
∫ DVD-Video format
This is a recording method which allows you to record and edit TV
broadcasts and so on.
≥Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be
recorded to a CPRM compatible disc. You can record to CPRM
compatible DVD-RAM on this unit.
≥Play is only possible on a compatible DVD player.
Use a DVD-RAM to record in DVD Video Recording format.
This recording method is the same as commercially available DVDVideo.
≥Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be
recorded.
≥These can be played on a DVD player. However programs
recorded on this unit must be finalized to be played on other DVD
players.
Use a DVD-R, DVD-R DL or DVD-RW to record in DVD-Video format.
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Play-only discs
Disc type
DVD-Video
DVD-Audio
DVD-RW
(DVD Video Recording format)
Audio CD
Video CD
Logo
–
Indicated in these
instructions with
Instructions
[DVD-V]
High quality
movie and
music discs
[DVD-A]
High fidelity
music discs
≥Played on
this unit in 2
channels
[-RW‹VR›]
[CD]
DVD-RW° recorded on another DVD
recorder
≥You can play programs that allow “One
time only recording” if they have been
recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
≥By formatting (l 54) the disc, you can
record to it in DVD-Video format.
≥It may be necessary to finalize the disc
on the equipment used for recording.
Recorded
audio and
music
(including CDR/RW°)
CD-R° and
CD-RW° with
music
recorded in
MP3 (l 32)
Still pictures
(JPEG and
TIFF)
recorded on
CD-R/RW°
Disc information
M6VP&PC.book 7 ページ
[VCD]
Recorded
music and
video
(including CDR/RW°)
° Play may be impossible on some DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format), CD-R or CD-RW discs due to the condition of the recording.
≥You can play still pictures (JPEG/TIFF), CD-DA, Video CD and MP3 format data recorded on CD-R/RW. Close the session or finalize the disc
after recording.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
Note about using a DualDisc
The digital audio content side of a DualDisc does not meet the technical specifications of the Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) format so play
may not be possible.
Regarding DVD-Audio
Some multi-channel DVD-Audio will prevent down-mixing (l 68) of all or part of their contents if this is the manufacturer’s intention. Tracks
that are prevented from being down-mixed will not play properly on this unit (e.g. audio is played from the front two channels only). Refer to
the disc’s jacket for more information.
Discs that cannot be played
≥2.6/5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm (5z)
≥3.95/4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥DVD-R recorded in DVD Video Recording format
≥DVD-R (DVD-Video format), DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL recorded on another unit and not finalized
(l 55, “Enabling discs to be played on other equipment –Finalize”)
≥PAL discs (you can still play the audio on DVD-Audio)
≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “1” or “ALL”
≥Blu-ray
≥DVD-ROM, +R 8cm (3z), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,
SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, DivX Video Disc, etc.
Concerning logo marks
Dolby Digital (l 57)
This is a method of coding digital signals
developed by Dolby Laboratories. Not only stereo
(2 channel) audio, these signals can also be multichannel audio. A large amount of audio
information can be recorded on one disc by this
method.
DTS Digital Surround (l 57)
This surround system is used in many movie
theaters around the world. The separation
between channels is good and the compression
ratio is low, so realistic sound effects are possible.
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a problem with
the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent damage caused by such
loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company.
≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit.
≥A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this unit.
7
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 8 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Disc information
Using DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL and +RW on this unit
Restrictions with DVD-R, etc.°
≥16:9 aspect programs are recorded in 4:3 aspect.
≥Either Main or SAP can be recorded for MTS broadcasts.
≥Playing the disc on other DVD players is not possible before finalizing.
° DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL and +RW are collectively referred to as “DVD-R, etc.” on this page.
Main
SAP
Hello
Hola
The selected audio only is recorded.
e.g., Main only
Record to DVD-R, etc.
Hello
16:9 aspect program
with Main and SAP
4:3 aspect
Therefore, follow the steps below when you use DVD-R, etc.
∫ When recording an SAP program to DVD-R, etc.
Select the audio to record before recording or transferring (copying).
Some television programs are broadcast in SAP (Secondary Audio Program). You have to select the audio recording type before recording or
transferring (copying) them to DVD-R, etc.
Select “Main” or “SAP” in “Select
MTS” in the Setup menu (l 57).
Main
SAP
Hello
Hola
SETUP
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
Dynamic Range Compression
Off
Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)
Main
Record to DVD-R, etc.
The selected audio only is recorded.
Main
Hello
Digital Audio Output
Select Audio Channel for DV Input
Stereo 1
∫ Playing the disc on other DVD players
The disc must be finalized after recording or transferring (Copying) (l 55).
It is necessary to finalize DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or transferring (copying) titles to them. You can then play them as a
commercially sold DVD-Video. However the discs become play-only and you can no longer record or transfer (copy).°
° You can record and transfer (copy) again if you format DVD-RW.
Play on other DVD equipment
Record to DVD-R, etc.
PLAY MODE
SETUP
Í
∫
TOP MENU
1
;
DISPLAY
SUB
-TITLE
RETURN
MENU
AUDIO
ANGLE
A.SURROUND
Finalize
CANCEL
3
2
1
7
6
S10
6
5
4
0
9
8
5
PAGE
GROUP
:
9
VOLUME
s
r
CHG
SEARCH
ENTER
VOL
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
RETURN
MENU
ON
Í /I
Í
DOUBLE RE-MASTER CD SEQUENTIAL
DISC
1
2
3
4
5
∫
;
1
:/6
5/9
DISC EXCHANGE
DISC SKIP
<OPEN/CLOSE
OFF
DC
IN
9V
OPEN
UND
A.SURRO
REPEAT
MODE
MONITOR
MODE
PICTURE
∫ Recording to a DVD-R DL and +R DL
DVD-R DL and +R DL discs have two layers of recording surface on one side.
It is not possible to record continuously from the first layer to the second layer. Recording stops when space on the first layer becomes full.
You must close the first layer to start recording on the second layer. Closing makes the first layer unavailable for recording (editing is still
available). You cannot cancel closing. Make certain before proceeding.
The second layer
It is not possible to
record continuously
from the first layer to
the second layer.
The available
space
The first layer
(Disc
inner side)
Title 1
(Disc
outer side)
Title 2
Recording/Playback direction
8
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 9 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
∫ About batteries
≥Insert so the poles
(i and j) match
those in the remote
control.
≥Do not use
rechargeable type
batteries.
∫ How to use the remote control
Aim at the sensor, avoiding obstacles, at a maximum range of 7 m
(23 feet) directly in front of the unit.
Remote control signal sensor
R6/LR6, AA
Do not:
≥mix old and new batteries.
≥use different types at the same time.
≥heat or expose to flame.
≥take apart or short circuit.
≥attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
20
20
30
30
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
Note
≥If you cannot operate the unit or TV using the remote control after
changing the batteries, please re-enter the codes (l 19).
7 m (23 feet) directly
in front of the unit
Notes
≥Keep the transmission window and the unit’s sensor free from
dust.
≥Operation can be affected by strong light sources, such as direct
sunlight, inverter fluorescent lamps, and the glass doors on
cabinets.
Disc information/The remote control/Disc handling
The remote control
Disc handling
∫ How to hold a disc
∫ Handling precautions
Do not touch the recorded surface.
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and unbalanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not drop, stack, or cause impact to discs. Do not place objects
on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
- Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs etc.).
- Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
- Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart shapes.
∫ Concerning non-cartridge discs
Be careful about scratches and dirt.
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
≥Do not place in the following areas:
- In direct sunlight.
- In very dusty or humid areas.
- Near a heater.
- Locations susceptible to significant differences in temperature
changes (condensation can occur).
- Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
or cartridges when you are not using them.
9
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 10 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Video cassette information
∫ Video cassettes
≥Break off the video cassette’s tab to prevent accidental erasure. Cover the hole with a double layer of
adhesive tape when you want to use the video cassette for recording again.
≥You can use video cassettes with the VHS and S-VHS marks, but the unit is unable to make full use of the
characteristics of S-VHS video cassettes.
Tab
∫ Video cassette care
≥Poor quality or damaged video cassettes can cause the heads to become dirty and malfunction. Store your video cassettes carefully and
discard them when they become dirty or damaged.
≥Never use video cassettes on which juice has been spilled or those that are extremely damaged since this will not only cause the heads to
become dirty, but will also make the unit malfunction.
∫ Maintenance
Cleaning the video heads
Dirt on the video heads can cause poor recording and play.
If the picture does not improve, use an optional head-cleaning cassette (part number NVTCL30PT). If the problem persists, seek advice from a qualified service person.
Useful features
You can enjoy both DVD and VHS with the unit.
This DVD Recorder can record images and sounds in high quality to rapid random access capable DVD media. This has resulted in many new
features that outperform older tape formats. The following information summarizes a few of these features.
ª DVD
Progressive output (l 15, 18)
If you connect the unit with a progressive output-compatible TV, you
can enjoy higher-quality and less-flicker images than conventional
TVs (of the interlace output type) can present.
Finalize (l 55)
This function enables you to play recorded DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) +R and +R DL on other players.
Instant play (l 30)
This function can quickly find and play a video program you wish to
watch. Direct Navigator guides you to the beginning of a previously
recorded video immediately.
Quick view (l 30)
This function allows you to watch news, information and other
programs in a short time.
Chasing play (l 26)
There is no need to wait until recording is complete. Without
stopping recording, you can play the video currently being recorded
from its beginning.
Instant recording (l 23)
You no longer need to search for empty disc space. By pressing the
recording button, the unit finds available recording space and begins
recording right away.
Simultaneous recording and play (l 26)
With this function, you can play a previously recorded video program
while recording another program.
Time Slip (l 31)
This function enables you to jump to the scene you specify during
play.
One touch transfer (copy) (l 45, 47)
This function can copy video from VHS to DVD and vice versa.
DV input terminal (l 50)
The DV camcorder recording function of this unit lets you easily copy
a video to the DVD by connecting only a single DV cable.
ª VHS
Long recording (l 24)
With this function, you can record approx. 10 hours of video onto a
T-120 cassette, for example.
10
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 11 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Remote control
(14)
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
(1)
(2)
(15)
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
(3)
(4)
(5)
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
DELETE
SKIP/INDEX
REW
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
FF
PLAY
CM SKIP
SCHEDULE
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
(20)
(21)
(22)
RETURN
(23)
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS
(17)
(18)
(19)
TIONS
FUNC
(7)
ADD/DLT
CH
SLOW/SEARCH
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
(6)
CH
RESET
STOP
(16)
F Rec
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
∫ [DRIVE SELECT] button
≥Before performing DVD operations, be sure to
press the [DRIVE SELECT] button to select DVD
side. Also, make sure the DVD indicator lights up
on the unit.
≥Before performing VHS operations, be sure to
press the [DRIVE SELECT] button to select VHS
side. Also, make sure the VHS indicator lights up on
the unit.
DVD
DRIVE
SELECT
VHS
DVD
DRIVE
SELECT
VHS
Turn the unit on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 16
Select drive (DVD or VHS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l above
Select channels and title numbers etc./Enter numbers
Cancel/Reset the tape counter
Basic operations for recording and play
Skip the specified time/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 31
Jet rewind button (JET REW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 34
(7) Direct Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 30, 32
(8) Selection/Enter, Frame-by-frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 16, 31
(9) Show sub menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 33, 38, 42
(10) Select audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 25, 31
View select (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 48
(11) Show on-screen menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 36
View select (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 48
(12) Start recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 23
(13) Change recording mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 23, 28
(14) Transmission window
(15) TV operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 19, 26
(16) Channel select/
TRACKING/V-LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 35
(17) Add/delete channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 17
(18) Input select (IN1, IN2, DV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 50
(19) Delete items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 52
(20) Skip a minute forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 31
(21) Show scheduled recording list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 28
(22) Show FUNCTIONS window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 37
(23) Return to previous screen
(24) Select VCR/TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 21
(25) Create chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 31
(26) Start Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 27
(27) Show status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 35, 37
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Video cassette information/Useful features/Control reference guide
Control reference guide
Notes
≥Buttons such as the [¥, REC] button do not protrude as much as
other buttons to stop them from being pressed accidentally.
≥The word “button” is not used in these operating instructions so
“Press the [ENTER] button.” is shown as “Press [ENTER].”
≥You can use this remote control to operate your TV if you set the
TV manufacturer code (l 19).
11
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 12 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Control reference guide
Main unit
(1)
Remote control
signal sensor
(2)
Cassette compartment
EJECT
(3) (4) (5)
Disc tray
OPEN /CLOSE
POWER
CH
㪛㪭㪛
DRIVE
SELECT
REC
COPYING
㪭㪟㪪
IN 2
(6)
S VIDEO
VIDEO
L /MONO AUDIO R
(7)
(8) (9)
The unit’s display
Cassette eject button (<, EJECT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 22
Disc tray open/close button (<, OPEN/CLOSE) . . . . . . l 22
Stop button (∫). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 30, 34
Play/t1.3 button (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 30, 34
Recording button (¥, REC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 23, 50
DVD/VHS POWER on/off button (Í/I, POWER) . . . . . . . l 16
≥To switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa.
In the standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small
amount of power.
(7) IN2 input terminals (IN2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 50
(8) DVD-SEARCH, VHS-REW/FF buttons (V/6, 5/W)
(9) Channel up/down buttons (CH, X, W). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 35
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(10) (11)
(12)
(13)
(10) DVD/VHS drive indicator
≥Lights when the DVD or VHS drive is selected.
(11) DRIVE SELECT button
≥Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
(12) Connector for a digital video (DV) camcorder . . . . . . . l 50
(13) One Touch Transfer (copying) operation button
≥From VHS to DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 45
≥From DVD to VHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 47
The unit’s display
[A]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Common to DVD/VHS
[A] Recording mode indicator
DVD:
XP, SP, LP, EP: (l 24)
XP SP LP EP (all on): FR mode (l 27)
VHS:
SP, LP°, EP, VP: (l 24)
° Playback only
[B] TV indicator
≥The indicator lights during the TV mode and it goes out during
the VCR mode. You can switch the mode by using [VCR/TV].
(l 21)
[C] Main display
≥Current time
≥Disc recording and play counter
≥VHS recording and play counter
≥Transfer (Copying) messages
≥Miscellaneous messages, etc.
12
RQTV0134
(1)
[B]
[C]
(2)
(3)
VHS
(1) Scheduled recording indicator ( ) (l 28)
On:
When a scheduled recording program is registered and
recordable tape is inserted.
Flashes:
The scheduled recording indicator flashes when the unit cannot
go to scheduled recording standby (e.g. there is no tape, etc).
(2) Tape indicator
(3) Tape operation status
DVD
(1) Scheduled recording indicator ( ) (l 28)
On:
When a scheduled recording program is registered and a
recordable disc is inserted.
Flashes:
The scheduled recording indicator flashes when the unit cannot
go to scheduled recording standby (e.g. there is no disc, etc).
(2) Disc operation status
(3) Disc indicator
M6VP&PC.book 13 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
This section includes diagrams of two common methods of connection (A-B, pages 13-14). Please connect using the one that best
suits you.
≥Visit Panasonic’s homepage for more information about connection methods. (This is in English only.)
http://www.panasonic.com/consumer_electronics/dvd_recorder/dvd_connection.asp
≥Before doing any connection, turn off all the equipments and read the appropriate operating instructions.
≥Peripheral equipments and optional cables are sold separately unless otherwise indicated.
≥You need to subscribe to a cable TV or satellite service to enjoy viewing their programme.
≥Consult your service provider regarding appropriate cable box.
∫ Do not connect the unit through a video cassette
recorder
∫ The unit’s RF OUT terminal
The picture and sound signal from this unit go through the RF OUT
terminal to the television.
Refer to page 14 if the antenna connector doesn’t match.
Video signals sent through video cassette recorders will be
affected by copyright protection systems and the picture will not be
shown correctly on the TV.
∫ When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household AC outlet. This unit
consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off
(approx. 8 W).
A
TV
TV
The unit
VCR
VCR
The unit
Control reference guide/STEP 1 Connection
STEP 1 Connection
Connection with a television
∫ Connection (with Audio/Video cable)
Connect in numerical order 1 to 4.
≥After this connection, set the RF output channel “OFF”
(l 16), and then press TV/VIDEO button of TV remote
controller to select the AV input mode to the connected
TV terminal. You can watch a video from this unit on
your TV.
∫ Connection (without Audio/Video cable)
You do not need to connect “3”.
The unit supplies a signal to the TV via the 75 ≠ coaxial
cable on channel 3 or 4. It is possible to view the video
picture on your TV in the same way that you watch TV
broadcasts.
≥After this connection, set the RF output channel “CH3”
or “CH4” (l 16).
This unit’s rear panel
Television
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
R
L
Cable from wall or
antenna signal
VHF/UHF
RF IN
Red White Yell
Yellow
ellow
Audio/Video cable
(Included)
3
2
75 h
coaxial
cable
(Included)
75 h
coaxial
cable
1
Red White Yell
Yellow
ellow
To household
AC outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
To
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
Y
PB
PR
RF
IN
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
R-AUDIO-L
To RF IN
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
RF
OUT
R-AUDIO-L
DVD
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PRIORITY OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VHF/UHF
To RF OUT
4
AC power supply cord (Included)
Connect only after all other connections are complete.
13
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 14 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
STEP 1 Connection
B
Connection with a television and cable box or satellite receiver
Television
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
R
L
Cable from wall or
antenna signal
VHF/UHF
RF IN
Red White Yell
Yellow
ellow
75 h
coaxial
cable
Audio/Video cable
(Included)
This unit’s rear panel
5
2
Red White Yell
Yellow
ellow
To household
AC outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
To
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
Y
PB
RF
IN
PR
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
R-AUDIO-L
To RF IN
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
RF
OUT
R-AUDIO-L
DVD
R-AUDIO-L
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PRIORITY OUT
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VHF/UHF
To RF OUT
To IN1
Red White Yell
Yellow
ellow
7
Audio/Video cable
AC power supply cord (Included)
Connect only after all other
Cable box or
connections are complete.
Satellite receiver
Satellite antenna
(Satellite receiver only)
Red
IN
Satellite Cable
6
White Yell
Yellow
ellow
4 3
75 h
coaxial
cable
(Included)
OUT
AUDIO
R
L VIDEO S VIDEO
RF
1
75 h
coaxial
cable
If the antenna connector doesn’t match
Use one of the following connections to suit the antenna lead to the unit’s RF IN terminal, and the 75 ≠ coaxial cable to the antenna terminals on
the equipment (television etc.). Refer to other equipment’s operating instructions.
Other antenna connections to the unit
Other antenna connections to the television
∫ A single twin lead
∫ A twin lead terminal
from the antenna
300–75 ≠ transformer
(Flat) Twin lead
300 ≠ cable
To this unit’s RF IN
terminal
∫ A twin lead and a coaxial cable
75–300 ≠ transformer
VHF or UHF
75 ≠ coaxial cable
Television
∫ A twin lead and coaxial plug terminal
from the antenna
VHF/UHF band separator
VHF/UHF band mixer
(Flat) Twin lead 300 ≠ cable
75 ≠ coaxial cable
(Round)75 ≠ coaxial cable
VHF
UHF
Television
To this unit’s RF IN
terminal
∫ Two twin leads
∫ Two twin lead terminals
from the antenna
VHF/UHF band separator
VHF/UHF band mixer
(Flat) Twin lead
300 ≠ cable
75 ≠ coaxial cable
UHF
Television
To this unit’s RF
IN terminal
300–75 ≠ transformer
VHF
DVD output and DVD/VHS output
The unit has DVD/VHS COMMON output terminals and DVD PRIORITY output terminals.
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
≥For DVD/VHS COMMON output terminals, both DVD and VHS
signals can be output.
DVD/VHS COMMON output
Y
PB
PR
DVD PRIORITY OUT
≥You can also playback a tape with the DVD PRIORITY output
terminal except while recording, or making a scheduled recording,
on the DVD. (l 15)
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
DVD
VIDEO
S VIDEO
PRIORITY OUT
14
v
RQTV0134
DVD PRIORITY output
R-AUD
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
To enjoy higher picture quality
∫ Connecting to the TV S VIDEO IN terminal
∫ Connecting to the TV COMPONENT VIDEO
IN terminals
S VIDEO OUT terminal
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)
After completing “Connection with a television” (l 13) or
“Connection with a television and cable box or satellite receiver”
(l 14), connect S VIDEO cable as illustration below.
Usually you can watch a picture from INPUT2 terminal. When you
want to playback VHS while recording on DVD, change to INPUT1
terminal.
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal
These terminals can be used for either interlace or progressive
output (l 68) and provide a purer picture than the S VIDEO OUT
terminal.
After completing “Connection with a television” (l 13) or
“Connection with a television and cable box or satellite receiver”
(l 14), connect COMPONENT VIDEO cable as illustration below.
Usually you can watch a picture from COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
terminal. When you want to playback VHS while recording on DVD,
change to INPUT1 terminal.
≥Connect to terminals of the same color.
Audio/Video cable
(Included)
Television
Red White Yellow
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
R
L
INPUT1
Television
INPUT2
PB
INPUT1
Red White
AUDIO IN
R
L
COMPONENT
VIDEO INPUT
Y
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO
IN
R
L
IN
Red White
This unit’s
rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
R
L
PR
Red White Yellow
Component
Video cable
Red White Yell
Yellow
ellow
Red White Yell
Yellow
ellow
Y
PB
PR
STEP 1 Connection
M6VP&PC.book 15 ページ
Audio/Video
udio/Video
ca
cable
le (Included)
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
PB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PR
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
R-AUDIO-L
OPTICAL
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
DVD
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PRIORITY OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
This unit’s
rear panel
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
R-AUDIO-L
DVD
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PRIORITY OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
Red White
Audio cable
S Video cable
Red White
Audio cable
Connecting an amplifier or system component
∫ Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal
≥To enjoy multi-channel surround on DVD-Video,
connect an amplifier with a built-in decoder
displaying these logo marks using an optical digital
audio cable and change the settings in “Digital Audio
Output” (l 57).
≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not
included), check the terminal shape of the connected
equipment.
≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.
≥Even if using this connection, output will be only 2 channels when
playing DVD-Audio.
Amplifier’s
rear panel
∫ Connection to a stereo amplifier
Amplifier’s
rear panel
OPTICAL IN
AUDIO IN
R L
Red White
Insert fully, with this side
facing up.
Optical digital audio cable
Do not bend sharply when
connecting.
This unit’s
rear panel
Audio cable
RF
IN
Y
PB
PR
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
Red White
R-AUDIO-L
DVD
RF
OUT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PRIORITY OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VHF/UHF
15
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 16 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
STEP 2 Plug-in Auto Tuning
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
Í
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
Numeric
buttons
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
CH, W, X
CH
ADD/DLT
CH
DELETE
RESET
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
REW
STOP
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
CH,
ADD/DLT
AUDIO
A
REC
CableTV Mode
(Cable)
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
Band
VHF
UHF
VHF
CATV LOW BAND
CATV MID/SUPER BAND
CATV HYPER BAND
Channel
2 to 13
14 to 69
2 to 13
95 to 99
14 to 36
37 to 65
66 to 94
100 to 125
1
ULTRA BAND
SPECIAL CATV CHANNEL
Regarding DST (Daylight Saving Time) (l 17)
Legal revision is expected to change the DST period in 2007.
When you use the unit with DST on, the change may cause the
unit’s clock to go behind the actual time. Check the DST setting in
Set Clock manually in the Setup menu, set DST off and reset the
clock precisely if you are using this function.
Preparation
≥Turn on the TV and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to the unit. (Example: AV input, CH3 or CH4)
≥If you connect the unit through a cable box or satellite receiver
(l 14), tune to your local PBS for Auto Clock Setting to work.
If there is no local PBS, set the clock manually (l 17, “Set Clock
Manually”).
[1] Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER].
[2] Press [CH, W, X] to
select an RF output
channel number.
Select Language
Seleccione el idioma
Sélection de langue
English
Connection (without Audio/
Video cable):
Select “CH3” or “CH4” which
displays the screen on the right.
Connection (with Audio/Video
cable):
Select “OFF”.
16
RQTV0134
The unit can be turned on faster, in about
1 second. Please note that Quick Start
mode slightly increases power
consumption when the unit is off.
(See Operation instructions for details)
Turn Quick Start on ?
On
ENTER
CM SKIP
After plugging the unit into your household AC outlet and pressing
[Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on for the first time, the unit
assists you to set the on-screen language, and automatically tunes
in all the channels it can receive and sets the clock.
The unit automatically determines the type of transmission (airwaves
or cable) and puts them into channels as follows.
Antenna Mode
(Airwaves)
ENTER
Quick start setting
PLAY
R
DIRECT NAVIGATO
SUB MENU
4:3 TV
16:9 Widescreen TV
Off
TIONS
FU N C
µ
ENTER
If you activate “Quick Start”
function, select “On”.
Aspect Ratio Selection
Select TV type and press ENTER.
(Please refer to Operation Instruction
for details.)
FF
SCHEDULE
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
[3] Use [3, 4] to select the
language and press
[ENTER].
[4] Press [3, 4] to select
“4:3 TV” or “16:9
Widescreen TV” and
press [ENTER].
[5] Press [3, 4] to select
“On” or “Off” and press
[ENTER].
Español
Français
Press ENTER
Pulse ENTER
Appuyer sur ENTER
About “Quick Start” function
If you set Quick Start to on, you can start recording to DVDRAM about 1 second after you press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER]
to turn the unit on and then sequentially press [¥, REC].
The following happens when you have selected “On”.
≥Power consumption in standby mode increases because
power is supplied to the unit.
[6] Press [3, 4] to select
“Internal TV Tuner” or
“Input” and press
[ENTER].
When you do not set channels
on this unit, select “Input”. The
unit then displays “Set Clock
Manually” screen.
Set the clock manually. (l 17)
The unit’s display
Each time you press the button:
CH 3 (Default setting) (# CH4 (# OFF
^-----------------------------------------------J
Internal TV Tuner
Input
ENTER
[7] Press [ENTER] to start Plug-in Auto Tuning.
≥The unit then proceeds with Auto Clock Setting. The time is
displayed when Auto Clock Setting is finished.
Set Channels Automatically
Ch.
1
Set Channels Automatically
Proceeding . . .
1 1 1
Set Clock Automatically
Auto Clock Setting is complete.
4/4/2007 12:15 AM
DST............. On
Time Zone.... CST
≥DST, Daylight Saving Time, shows the summertime setting.
≥Time Zone shows the time difference from Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT).
EST (Eastern Standard Time) l GMT j5
CST (Central Standard Time) l GMT j6
MST (Mountain Standard Time)l GMT j7
PST (Pacific Standard Time) l GMT j8
AST (Alaska Standard Time) l GMT j9
HST (Hawaii Standard Time) l GMT j10
For other areas: xx hr
∫ When one of the following screens appears
“No channels were found.”
Set Channels Automatically
After turning off the unit, confirm
following and perform setup
No channels were found.
Please check antenna or cable connection,
again.
then...
≥Confirm the antenna cable is
firmly connected to RF IN
Press ENTER again.
terminal.
≥If you do not set channels on this unit, select “Input” in step 6.
“Auto Clock Setting is
Set Clock Automatically
incomplete.”
Press [ENTER] and set clock
Auto Clock setting is incomplete.
manually. (l 17)
[8] Press [ENTER].
The unit’s display
Default Recording Source
Please select the source from which this
unit will record each time it is turned
on. Note: Selecting "Internal TV Tuner"
will start the Auto Channel Clock
Settings process.
This one time process takes a few minutes.
Press ENTER
to set clock manually.
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
∫ If the clock is an hour slower or faster than the actual
time
Select “j1” or “i1” in “Adjust Time Zone” in the Setup menu (l 56).
STEP 2 Plug-in Auto Tuning
M6VP&PC.book 17 ページ
∫ Adding and deleting channels
Add or delete channels if necessary channels are not set or
unnecessary channels are set.
[1] Press the numeric buttons to select a channel.
∫ Restart Plug-in Auto Tuning
(after relocation, for example)
Antenna Mode (Airwaves)
e.g.,
“5”:
[0] )[5]
“15”:
[1] )[5]
CableTV Mode (Cable)
e.g.,
“5”:
[0] )[0] )[5]
“15”:
[0] )[1] )[5]
“115”:
[1] )[1] )[5]
Signal source, RF output channel, channel caption revert to the
default values when you perform the procedure below.
Scheduled recording settings are also cleared.
When the unit is on and stopped
[1] Press and hold [CH, W]
and [CH, X] on the main
unit for about 5 seconds.
The unit turns off.
The unit’s display
≥You can also use [CH, W, X] to select a channel.
[2] Press [CH, ADD/DLT].
e.g., The channel is deleted.
[2] Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on.
Plug-in Auto Tuning starts.
Channel 15 Deleted
∫ Restart Set Channels Automatically
[1]
∫ Set Clock Manually
“Clock Settings” made here are applied to VHS as well.
While stopped
[1]
Press [FUNCTIONS].
FUNCTIONS
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
No Disc
No Disc
Program
Copy
Other Functions
Setup
ENTER
RETURN
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
FUNCTIONS
No Disc
No Disc
Program
Setup
Copy
Other Functions
ENTER
RETURN
[3] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
Setup
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
Quick Start
On
Restore Default Settings
[4] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [2, 1].
[5] Select “Clock Settings” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[6] Select “Set Clock Manually” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
Set Clock Manually
Signal Source (RF IN)
Antenna
Set Channels Automatically
Month
1
Channel Captions
Preset Channel Captions
Manual Channel Captions
Day
/
1
/
Year
Hour
2000 SAT
12
Minute
:
00 PM
DST
Time Zone
Off
EST
ENTER
[4] Select “Channel” with [3, 4] and press [2, 1].
[5] Select “Signal Source (RF IN)” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
Setup
Signal Source (RF IN)
Channel
Setup
Disc
Cable TV
Antenna
[6] Select “Antenna” or “Cable TV” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[7] Select “Set Channels Automatically” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[8] Press [ENTER].
≥Auto Channel Setting starts. This takes a few minutes.
[9] Press [ENTER].
Off Timer
6 Hours
Remote Control Code Set Code 1
Clock Settings
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
VHS
[7] Use [2, 1] to select the item you want to
change, and press [3, 4] to change the setting.
≥DST (Daylight Saving Time): On or Off
If you select “On”, the clock is advanced one hour starting at
2 a.m. on the first Sunday in April and ending at 2 a.m. on the
last Sunday in October.
≥Time Zone (l 20)
[8] Press [ENTER].
≥The clock starts.
≥When you change the time zone, the recording times for titles
recorded before the time zone adjustment also change to
correspond to the new time zone.
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To cancel in the middle
Press [RETURN].
∫ To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
17
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 18 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Other settings
∫ Manual Channel Captions
TRACKING/V-LOCK
DVD/VHS
≥Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Channel captions”.
POWER
[5] Select “Manual Channel Captions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[6] Use [3, 4] to select the channel and press [1].
POWER
Í
VOLUME
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
≥Channels are only displayed if they contain a station and if
preset captions have not been added.
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
RESET
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
TIME SLIP/ JET
0REW SELECT
Numeric
buttons
RESET
≥You can choose from the following characters:
A to Z, 0 to 9, -, &, !, /, (space)
≥To delete the caption, press [¢, CANCEL].
≥Repeat this step to enter the other characters.
DELETE
REW
TIONS
FU N C
R
DIRECT NAVIGATO
FF
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
[7] Use [3, 4] to select the first character and
press [1].
ADD/DLT
CH
SLOW/SEARCH
SCHEDULE
SKIP/INDEX
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
CH
Setup
FUNCTIONS
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
VHS
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
Channel captions
Manual Channel Captions
Channel Number
Caption
6
8
-------
10
AAAA
12
23
-------
ENTER
You can use the preset captions, or manually enter new ones
yourself.
The captions you enter are used as channel names and displayed
on the Direct Navigator screen.
[8] Use [2, 1] to return to the “Channel Number”
column.
[1]
[9] Press [ENTER].
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other
Functions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[3] Select “Setup” with [3,
4] and press [ENTER].
[4] Select “Channel” with
[3, 4] and press [2, 1].
≥Go to the item you want to set
next.
FUNCTIONS
No Disc
No Disc
∫ To return to the previous screen
Program
Press [RETURN].
Setup
Copy
∫ To exit the screen
Other Functions
Press [RETURN].
ENTER
RETURN
Setup
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
Signal Source (RF IN)
Antenna
Set Channels Automatically
Channel Captions
Preset Channel Captions
Manual Channel Captions
≥Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Channel captions”.
Setup
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
VHS
Selecting television type
You do not have to change the setting when connected to a 4:3
standard aspect TV that is not compatible with progressive output.
(l 68)
[1]
∫ Preset Channel Captions
[5] Select “Preset Channel
Captions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[6] Use [3, 4] to select the
caption and press [1].
≥Repeat steps 6 to 8 to enter other channels.
Preset Channel Captions
Caption
Channel Number
GLOB
--
ABC
--
PBS
CBS
---
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[4] Select “TV Screen” with [3, 4] and press [2, 1].
[5] Select “TV Type” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
4:3 TV
You can choose from the
following captions.
ABC, PBS, CBS, CNN, FOX,
ESPN, NBC, HBO, A&E, AMC, FAM, MAX, MTV, SHOW, TBS,
USA, TNT, CBC, UPN, CTV, WB, TSN, DSC, GLOB
≥When selecting the caption, press and hold [3, 4] to scroll up
and down the screen quickly.
≥Channels are displayed only when they contain a station and if
captions have not been added manually.
≥To delete the channel number, press [¢, CANCEL].
≥Repeat steps 6 and 7 as necessary.
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
VHS
ENTER
[7] Use [3, 4] to select the channel corresponding
to the caption and press [2].
[8] Press [ENTER].
RQTV0134
Aspect 4:3 & 480i
Aspect 4:3 & 480p
16:9 Aspect (Widescreen TV)
Aspect 16:9 & 480i
Aspect 16:9 & 480p
ENTER
≥Aspect 4:3/Aspect 16:9:
4:3
4:3 standard aspect TV
16:9
16:9 widescreen TV
≥480p/480i:
Select “480p” if the TV is compatible with progressive output.
[6] Use [3, 4] to select the item and press
[ENTER].
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
18
TV Type
Setup
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Television operation
To turn the TV on/off, change the TV input mode, select the TV
channel and change the TV volume by means of this remote control,
set the remote control as follows.
Point the remote control at the TV
While pressing [Í, POWER TV], enter the code
using the numeric buttons.
e.g., 0250: press [0] > [2] > [5] > [0].
Manufacturer and Code No.
Panasonic
0051, 0250
National
QUASAR
Change the remote control code on the main unit and on the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products
close together. When changing the remote control code, make sure
the two codes are same.
Use “1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.
[1]
While stopped
FUNCTIONS
No Disc
No Disc
PHILIPS (RC-5) 0054
RCA
0047
SAMSUNG
0060, 0587,
0702
0154
FISHER
0154
SANYO
GE
0047
SHARP
0093, 0165
GOLDSTAR
0178, 0317,
0457
SONY
0000
HITACHI
0145
SYLVANIA
0054
JVC
0053
THOMSON
0047
LG
0178, 0317,
0457
TOSHIBA
0156
ZENITH
0017
MAGNAVOX 0054
When other Panasonic products
respond to this remote control
Other settings
M6VP&PC.book 19 ページ
MITSUBISHI 0150
≥Test by turning on the TV and changing channels. Repeat the
procedure until you find the code that allows correct operation.
≥If your TV brand is not listed or if the code listed for your TV does
not allow control of your TV, this remote control is not compatible
with your TV.
[2]
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Select “Other
Functions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
ENTER
Select “Setup” with [3,
RETURN
4] and press [ENTER].
Select “Setup” with [3,
4] and press [2, 1].
Select “Remote Control Code” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
Use [3, 4] to select the code (1, 2 or 3) and
press [ENTER].
Program
Setup
Copy
Other Functions
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
≥The code on the unit has been set.
[7] While pressing [ENTER], press and hold for
about 2 seconds the numeric button ([1], [2] or
[3]) corresponding to the code you selected in
step 6.
≥The code on the remote control has been set.
[8] Press [ENTER].
∫ When the following indicator appears on the unit’s
display
The unit’s remote control code
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s
code (l step 7).
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
19
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 20 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Other settings
≥Time Zone shows the time difference from Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT).
EST (Eastern Standard Time) l GMT j5
CST (Central Standard Time) l GMT j6
MST (Mountain Standard Time) l GMT j7
PST (Pacific Standard Time) l GMT j8
AST (Alaska Standard Time) l GMT j9
HST (Hawaii Standard Time) l GMT j10
For other areas: xx hr
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
VOLUME
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
RESET
CH, W, X
CH
[8] Press [ENTER].
ADD/DLT
CH
∫ To cancel in the middle
DELETE
Press [RETURN].
SLOW/SEARCH
FF
REW
SKIP/INDEX
STOP
PAUSE
∫ Adjust Time Zone
PLAY
CM SKIP
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Clock Settings”.
TIONS
FU N C
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
Adjust the time zone (j1 or i1) if it was not set correctly with auto
clock setting.
You can set this menu only after “Set Clock Automatically” is
completed.
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
VCR/TV
Clock Settings
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
“Clock Settings” made here are applied to VHS as well.
[1]
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
FUNCTIONS
No Disc
No Disc
Program
Copy
Other Functions
ENTER
RETURN
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[4] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [2, 1].
Setup
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
VHS
Off Timer
6 Hours
Remote Control Code Set Code 1
Clock Settings
Quick Start
On
Restore Default Settings
[5] Select “Clock Settings” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
∫ Set Clock Automatically
[6] Select “Set Clock Automatically” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[7] Press [ENTER].
≥Auto setting starts. This can take some time, up to a few hours
in some cases. The following screen appears when setting is
complete.
Set Clock Automatically
Auto Clock Setting is complete.
4/4/2007
11:15 AM
DST...................
On
Time Zone.......
CST
20
RQTV0134
[6] Select “Adjust Time
Zone” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[7] Select “j1” or “i1”
with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
≥If the time was not set correctly, use manual clock setting or
time zone adjust.
≥DST, (Daylight Saving Time) shows the summertime setting.
Adjust Time Zone
j1
0
i1
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Other settings
M6VP&PC.book 21 ページ
Removing Interference
Connection (without Audio/Video cable) only
TV screen
Picture with interference
In some cases, interference (lines or patterning) or a very poor
picture may appear on the TV when the DVD Recorder is
connected. If this happens, follow the steps below to change
the video playback channel (RF output channel) to remove the
interference.
[1] Press [FUNCTIONS] for
more than 5 seconds.
RF Output Channel
The RF output channel number is
displayed on the unit display.
Press the channel up/down buttons
to select a RF Output Channel.
Ch.
[2] Press [CH, W, X] to
select a channel number
(CH3 or CH4).
3
ENTER
The unit’s display
The unit’s display
Each time you press the button:
CH 3 (Default setting) (# CH4 (# OFF
^-----------------------------------------------J
≥Set the RF output channel of the DVD Video Recorder to
“OFF” (RF OFF) when the DVD Video Recorder is connected
to the TV via the Audio/Video cable.
[3] Press [ENTER] to finish this setting.
The clear picture
∫ When you set the RF output channel to “CH3” or
“CH4”
A picture is output on CH3 or CH4 from RF output.
Press [VCR/TV] to switch the mode from TV to VCR, and vice
versa.
≥When the TV mode is selected, the “TV” indicator lights on the
unit’s display and you can watch TV.
≥When the “TV” indicator does not light on, then VCR mode is
selected and you can watch images from the unit.
21
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 22 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Recording television programs
Inserting a video cassette
DVD/VHS
The surface on which
you can see a roll of
tape should face up,
POWER
POWER
Í
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
DRIVE SELECT
VOLUME
Insert a video
cassette.
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
Numeric
buttons
∫
CH
ADD/DLT
CH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
REW
PAUSE
FF
PLAY
;
SCHEDULE
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
For remote control
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select VHS side and then press and
hold [∫, STOP] for about 3 or more seconds.
SUB MENU
µ
AUDIO
A
REC
TIONS
FU N C
ENTER
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
Before recording
STATUS
REC MODE
, EJECT
, OPEN/CLOSE
Inserting discs
[1] Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to
open the tray.
≥You can insert a cartridge or non-cartridge disc.
[2] Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to
close the tray.
≥If you insert a DVD-RAM with the write-protect tab set to
“PROTECT” (l 53), play starts automatically.
Notes
≥A double-sided disc should be loaded with the side you want to
record/play facing down.
≥It is not possible to record continuously from one side of a doublesided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it
over.
≥When using 8 cm (3q) DVD-RAM or 8 cm (3q) DVD-R, remove the
disc from the cartridge.
Non-cartridge disc
Cartridge disc
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Insert label-up.
(2) Insert fully so it clicks into place.
(3) Insert label-up with the arrow facing in.
22
RQTV0134
≥You can eject a video cassette even when the unit is in standby
mode. It switches back to standby once it ejects the video
cassette.
For main unit
≥Press [<, EJECT] on the main unit.
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
≥The unit is
automatically turned
on.
∫ To eject a video
cassette
DELETE
RESET
STOP
CH, W, X
[+RW]
≥The created title menu is deleted when recording on the disc.
Create the title menu again by using “Create DVD Top Menu” in
DVD Management. (l 55)
The Main or SAP only can be recorded for MTS broadcasts,
when recording to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL, +RW
If you do not connect a cable box
- Select “Main” or “SAP” in “Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)” in the
Setup menu. (l 57)
If you connect a cable box
- Select “Main” or “SAP” on the cable box.
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Recording procedures
[6] Press [¥, REC] to start recording.
Recording television programs
M6VP&PC.book 23 ページ
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [VHS]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
≥You can record up to 99 titles on a disc.
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥You can record up to 49 titles on a disc.
≥It is not possible to record digital broadcasts that allow “One time
only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL,
+RW or 8 cm (3q) DVD-RAM discs. Use a CPRM compatible DVDRAM.
≥Recording will take place on open space on the disc. Data will not
be overwritten.
≥If there is no space left on the recording disc, you will need to
erase unwanted titles (l 38, 52) or use a new disc.
When recording to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL or +RW
≥When recording MTS broadcasts
- If you do not connect a cable box
Select “Main” or “SAP” in “Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)” in
the Setup menu (l 57).
- If you connect a cable box
Select “Main” or “SAP” on the cable box.
≥The aspect ratio of the recorded image will be 4:3.
≥To play a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R or +R DL recorded using this unit on another playback
source, the disc must first be finalized (l 55).
≥[+RW] To enable play on other DVD equipment, please use
“Create DVD Top Menu” in DVD Management menu (l 55).
Preparation
≥Release protection (disc l 53, cartridge l 53). [RAM]
≥Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.
≥Select an audio type you want to record. (l 25)
[1] Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on.
[2] Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive you
want to record on (DVD or VHS).
[3] Insert a disc. (l 22)
≥When using a DVD-RAM for the first time with the unit, format
it to ensure accurate recording (l 54, “Deleting all contents of
a disc –Format Disc ( DVD )”).
≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during
recording. You can change them while recording is paused,
but the material is recorded as a separate title.
∫ To pause recording
Press [;, PAUSE]. (Press again to restart recording.)
≥Title is not split into separate titles. [DVD]
≥You can also press [¥, REC] to restart recording.
∫ To stop recording
Press [∫, STOP].
≥Recorded as 1 title until the position where stopped. [DVD]
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to complete recording
management information after recording finishes.
∫ To show the remaining time
[DVD]
Press [STATUS] several times. (l 37)
[VHS]
[1] Select “Select Tape Length” from the Setup and select the
corresponding tape length. (l 58)
[2] Press [STATUS] several times.
The remaining tape time may not be displayed correctly depending
on the tape used.
Notes
≥Even if the video cassette you use is labeled “S-VHS”, it is not
possible to record in the S-VHS system with the unit. It
records in the normal VHS system. [VHS]
≥When recording is paused for 5 or more minutes, the unit returns
to stop mode. [VHS]
≥The remaining tape time is only displayed during playback or
recording. [VHS]
or
Insert a video cassette with an intact accidental
erasure prevention tab. (l 22)
[4] Press [CH, W, X] to select the channel.
≥To select with the numeric buttons:
Antenna Mode (Airwaves)
e.g.,
“5”:
[0] )[5]
“15”:
[1] )[5]
CableTV Mode (Cable)
e.g.,
“5”:
[0] )[0] )[5]
“15”:
[0] )[1] )[5]
“115”:
[1] )[1] )[5]
[5] Press [REC MODE] to select the recording
mode.
Remaining time on the disc
[DVD]
XP, SP, LP or EP
[VHS]
SP, EP or VP
23
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 24 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Recording television programs
XP
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
DRIVE SELECT
Picture quality
SP
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
RESET
ADD/DLT
CH
STOP
REW
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
Note
When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8H) mode, play may not be
possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this
case use EP (6H) mode.
FF
PLAY
CM SKIP
FR (Flexible Recording mode l 27):
≥You can set FR mode when transferring (copying) or programming
scheduled recordings.
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
AUDIO
µ
TIONS
FU N C
ENTER
∫ Recording modes (VHS)
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS
Recording mode
F Rec
SP: You can record the length shown on the tape.
EP: 3 times the length of SP mode.
VP: 5 times the length of SP mode.
∫ Recording modes and approximate
recording times (DVD)
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may
become shorter than indicated.
DVD-RAM
1
DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R, +RW
(4.7 GB)
Single-sided
(4.7 GB)
Double-sided°
(9.4 GB)
XP (High quality)
1 hour
2 hours
1 hour
SP (Normal)
2 hours
4 hours
2 hours
LP
(Long recording)
4 hours
8 hours
4 hours
EP (Extra long
recording)
8 hours
(6 hours°2)
16 hours
(12 hours°2)
8 hours
(6 hours°2)
FR (Flexible
Recording)
8 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
for one side
8 hours
maximum
DVD-R DL, +R DL°3 (8.5 GB)
First layer
XP (High quality)
24
Second layer
55 minutes
50 minutes
SP (Normal)
1 hour 50 minutes
1 hour 40 minutes
LP
(Long recording)
3 hours 40 minutes
3 hours 20 minutes
EP (Extra long
recording)
7 hours 25 minutes
(5 hours 30 minutes°2)
6 hours 50 minutes
(5 hours 15 minutes°2)
7 hours 25 minutes
maximum
6 hours 50 minutes
maximum
FR (Flexible
Recording)
This unit uses variable bit rate (VBR) recording which varies the
amount of data recorded to suit the images, so actual recording
times and remaining recording times shown by the unit will be
different. (The difference will be especially noticeable with DVDR DL and +R DL.)
Use a disc with plenty of remaining time to be sure.
°1 It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of
a double sided disc to the other.
°2 When “Recording Time in EP Mode” has been set to “EP (6H)”
in the Setup menu. (l 57)
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6H)” than when
using “EP (8H)”.
°3 It is not possible to record continuously from first layer to second
layer.
RQTV0134
EP (8H)
Recording time
SCHEDULE
2, 1
ENTER
EP (6H)°2
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
∫
CH
LP
≥To have a longer recording capacity, select “EP” or “VP”.
≥If the image quality is important to you or if you wish to store the
tape for a long period, select “SP”.
≥The unit can play tapes recorded in LP mode on other equipment
(“LP” lights on the unit’s display).
VP mode:
≥A tape recorded in VP mode by the unit cannot be played
back by other VCRs. It is recommended to distinguish it from
other tapes by writing “VP” on the tape label, etc.
≥It takes more time for automatic tracking to work when playing
tapes recorded with VP mode, and it may not work at all with
some tapes. Do tracking manually if this is the case (l 35).
Note
You cannot play VP recording on other equipment.
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
∫ Off Timer
Selecting audio to record
The unit automatically switches to standby when it has not been
used for about 6 hours.
You can turn this feature off or change the time to 2 hours.
(l 56, “Off Timer”)
∫ When the format confirmation screen is
displayed
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
When you insert a new disc and a disc recorded on a computer or
other equipment, a format confirmation screen might be displayed.
Format the disc to use it. However all the recorded contents are
deleted.
Format
This disc is not formatted properly.
Do you want to format the
disc in DVD Management?
Yes
No
ENTER
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥Several steps are necessary to format a disc. Refer to “Deleting all
contents of a disc –Format Disc ( DVD )”. (l 54)
∫ When remove a recorded disc
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
When you press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit while stopped:
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc
for play on other equipment.
Make compatible for playback on other DVD players ( Finalize )
Finalizing is necessary to enable playback
of the disc on compatible DVD players.
Once finalized, titles cannot be added to the disc.
It will take approximately ٤ minutes. Start ?
[RAM]
Press [AUDIO].
Stereo # SAP Audio # Mono
^-------------------------------------}
Stereo:
Main audio (stereo). If the broadcast is “Mono_SAP”,
audio will be monaural even if you select Stereo
mode.
SAP
Audio:
Secondary audio program (SAP). If recorded in SAP,
main audio is also recorded.
Mono:
Main audio (monaural). Select “Mono” if reception is
poor during a stereo broadcast.
e.g., “Stereo” is selected.
“((” appears when the unit is receiving
the audio type you selected.
Recording television programs
M6VP&PC.book 25 ページ
No disc
CH 12
((Stereo
≥If you change the sound setting while recording, the recorded
sound will also change.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Select the audio (Main or SAP) in “Multi-channel
TV sound (MTS)” in the Setup menu. (l 57)
Auto Bilingual Choice Function
[VHS]
When a stereo broadcast or SAP broadcast is recorded and played
back on the unit, stereo sound will be automatically selected in the
case of a stereo broadcast and SAP sound will be automatically
selected in the case of a dual-sound broadcast (Mono and SAP or
Stereo and SAP).
≥This function may not work properly if the program is played back
from a mid point. In a case like this, press [AUDIO] and select the
right sound.
≥The function will not work with a cassette which has been recorded
using external equipment.
Press “REC” to start finalizing.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to postpone
finalizing. The disc can be played only on
this unit. You can Finalize it later.
When finalizing the disc
Press [¥, REC].
≥You cannot stop this process once you have started it.
≥If you want to provide the disc with a name or set play menu select,
select “Disc Name” (l 53) or “Playback will start with” (l 54) in
“DVD Management” before finalizing.
When opening the tray without disc finalization
Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
To specify a time to stop recording
–One Touch Recording
While recording
[1] Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive you
want to specify the time to stop recording
(DVD or VHS).
[2] Press [¥, REC] to select the recording time.
≥On the main unit, press [¥, REC].
The unit’s display
Each time you press the button:
Counter (Cancel) # OFF 0:30 # OFF 1:00 # OFF 1:30
^------- OFF 4:00 ! OFF 3:00 ! OFF 2:00 !----------}
For your reference
≥This does not work during scheduled recording or Flexible
Recording.
≥Recording stops and the set time is cleared if you press
[∫, STOP].
≥The set time is cleared if you change the recording mode or
channel while recording is paused. [DVD]
25
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 26 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Recording television programs
Playing while you are recording
DVD/VHS
[RAM]
POWER
POWER
DRIVE
SELECT
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
TRACKING/
TR
CKING/V-LOC
-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
RESET
STOP
CH, W, X
TV/VIDEO
REW
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
∫ Playing from the beginning of the title you
are recording–Chasing playback
DELETE
You can start play from the beginning of the title while continuing to
record it.
FF
PLAY
1
R
DIRECT NAVIGATO
AUDIO
A
REC
NS
SUB MENU
While recording or scheduled recording
Press [1, PLAY].
≥Play starts while recording proceeds.
CM SKIP
TIO
FUNC
ENTER
Hint
≥Sound is not output while fast-forwarding.
ADD/DLT
CH
SCHEDULE
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
Preparation
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
CH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
∫
VOLUME
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
For your reference
≥Play cannot be started until at least 2 seconds after recording
starts.
∫ Playing a title previously recorded while
recording–Simultaneous rec and play
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
RETURN
VCR/TV
F Rec
STATUS
You can play a title previously recorded while you are recording
another title.
[1]
While recording or scheduled recording
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR]. (l 30)
¥: Currently recording
Playing DVD while recording VHS
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Title View
DVD-RAM
07
You can play discs while recording VHS. The recording will not be
affected.
≥DVD playback (l 30)
For your reference
≥You cannot record on discs while VHS recording.
Playing VHS while recording DVD
You can play tapes while recording DVD. The recording will not be
affected.
≥VHS playback (l 34)
For your reference
≥You cannot record on tapes while DVD recording.
Watching the TV while recording
Preparation
≥Connection (without Audio/Video cable)
- Make sure that the TV indicator is lit on the unit’s display. If it is
not lit, press [VCR/TV] to light it.
≥Connection (with Audio/Video cable)
- Press [TV/VIDEO] to change the input mode to “TV”.
Press TV’s [CH, W, X] to select the desired TV
channel.
For your reference
≥You can also do this if the unit is making a scheduled recording.
≥The recording is unaffected.
26
RQTV0134
10 10/23 MON
--
08
8 10/23 MON
--
09
--
8 10/24 TUE
--
[2] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title and press
[ENTER].
≥ Play starts while recording proceeds.
∫ To exit the Direct Navigator screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
For your reference
≥During simultaneous recording and play, you cannot edit or erase
titles with the Direct Navigator or playlists.
≥Even if you start play while the unit is on standby for scheduled
recording, recording starts when the time you set is reached.
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Flexible Recording
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
The unit calculates a recording rate that enables the recording to fit
in the time you set (within the remaining time on the disc) with the
best picture quality.
Using “FLEXIBLE RECORDING” is convenient in these
kind of situations.
≥When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting
an appropriate recording more difficult
≥When you want to record a long program with the best
picture quality possible
e.g., Recording a 90 minute program to disc
If you select XP mode, the program will not fit one disc.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
Recording television programs
M6VP&PC.book 27 ページ
A second disc is necessary for
30 minutes of the program.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
If you select SP mode, the program will fit one disc.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
However there will be 30 minutes
remaining disc space
If you select “FLEXIBLE RECORDING” the
program will fit one disc perfectly.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
Preparation
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
≥Select the channel to record.
[1]
While stopped
Press [F Rec].
Flexible Recording
Record in FR mode.
Max recording time
Set recording time
Start
1 Hour 23 Min.
1 Hour 23 Min.
Cancel
Maximum recording time
This is the maximum
recording time in FR mode.
[2] Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and
press [3, 4] to set the recording time.
[3]
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
≥You cannot record for more than 8 hours.
When you want to start recording
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Start” and press
[ENTER].
≥Recording starts.
To exit the screen without recording
Press [RETURN].
To stop recording partway
Press [∫, STOP].
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS] several times. (l 37)
For your reference
≥During a Flexible Recording, all recording mode indicators light up
on the unit’s display.
≥It is not possible to change the channel or recording mode while
Flexible Recording is paused.
27
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 28 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Scheduled Recording
[2] Press [ENTER] to move and change the items
using [3, 4, 2, 1].
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
DRIVE
SELECT
Numeric
buttons
SCHEDULED
RECORDING
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
Channel
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
STOP
REW
PAUSE
On
:
CH,
ADD/DLT
DELETE
FF
CM SKIP
SCHEDULE
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
TIONS
FU N C
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
REC MODE
Cautions for using scheduled recording
on DVD and VHS
∫ Scheduled recording automatically starts at the set
time.
≥Scheduled recording can be started whether the unit is turned on
or off. When the unit is turned off, the sound and the video cannot
be outputted to the TV.
∫ Scheduled recording for TV programs cannot be
executed on both DVD and VHS at the same time.
Make sure the scheduled recording start times do not overlap on
both DVD and VHS Scheduled Recording List screens.
When the scheduled recording settings overlap:
≥When the start time of both scheduled recordings is the same, the
programme that you register later has priority.
≥If there is a VHS scheduled recording that overlaps a DVD
scheduled recording that is currently being recorded, it may not be
possible to operate the VHS during the overlap.
Programming scheduled recordings
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [VHS]
You can enter up to 16 programs a month in advance.
Preparation
≥Release protection (disc l 53, cartridge l 53) [RAM].
≥Insert a disc (l 22) and confirm there is sufficient empty space for
recording on it (l 37).
≥Check that the clock is set to the correct time.
≥When connecting a cable box or satellite receiver, select the
channel on the cable box or satellite receiver before scheduled
recording starts.
[1] Press [SCHEDULE].
≥Make sure “New Scheduled Recording” is selected.
New Scheduled
Recording is
selected.
Schedule
List
Remain
No Channel Date
01 4
5/ 6 Sat
Off
:
5/ 5 Fri 6:11 PM
Drive Mode
ENTER t
t
≥You may use the numeric buttons to enter “Channel”, “Date”,
“On”, and “Off”.
ADD/DLT
CH
SCHEDULE
RQTV0134
1:00 XP
:
Title Name
PLAY
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
28
Date
P
CH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
DVD
VHS
TRACKING/V-LOCK
RESET
∫
VOLUME
Remain
DVD
VHS
1:00 XP
:
Off
Drive
On
6:10 PM 6:30 PM DVD
New Scheduled Recording
5/ 5 Fri 6:11 PM
Mode Check
XP
OK
≥Channel (Program Position/TV Station Name)
≥Date
You can also make a daily or weekly program.
Each daily or weekly program is counted as one program.
≥On (start time)/Off (finish time)
The time increases or decreases in 30-minute increments if
you hold down the button.
≥Drive
You can select DVD or VHS drive.
You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
DVD,.VHS
≥Mode (Recording mode)
You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording
mode.
[DVD] XP,.SP,.LP,.EP,.FR,.XP... (l 24)
[VHS] SP,.EP,.VP,.AUTO°,.SP... (l 24)
°Auto SP/EP mode (l 29)
≥Title Name
Press [2, 1] to select “Title Name” and press [ENTER]
(l 51).
[3] Press [ENTER] when you have finished making
changes.
≥“ ” lights on the unit’s display. (l 12)
≥“Invalid Entry” is displayed when you enter the wrong item.
Reenter the item.
≥Make sure that the scheduled recording has been
programmed correctly on the SCHEDULE LIST screen (l 29).
≥To continue programming:
Select “New Scheduled Recording” and repeat steps 2 to 3.
[4] Press [RETURN].
Notes
≥When the unit is carrying out a scheduled recording, you may
utilize playback.
≥When the disc or video cassette is removed, scheduled recording
standby is cancelled (the “ ” indicator goes out). You can put the
unit back on standby by inserting a recordable disc or video
cassette (the “ ” indicator comes on again).
≥When a video cassette is not inserted or a video cassette with no
accidental erasure prevention tab is inserted, the warning
message appears before the recording starts because scheduled
recording cannot be executed.
≥When recording more than one program in a row, for DVD-RAM
the first few seconds, and for DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R,
+R DL or +RW about the first 30 seconds of all programs from the
second one onwards will not be recorded.
≥Even if you set the Title Name on the scheduled recording screen,
it is not recorded on video cassette.
≥If you set “DST” (Daylight Saving Time) to “ON” when manually
setting the clock (l 17), scheduled recording may not work when
summer switches to winter and vice versa.
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
∫ Cancel scheduled recording that has
already begun
Preparation
≥Select the drive with the scheduled recording you want to cancel
by pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1]
∫ Check, change or delete programs
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the scheduled
recording list by pressing [SCHEDULE].
[1] Press [SCHEDULE].
Schedule
List
Press [∫, STOP].
[2]
Remain
No Channel Date
When unit is on
≥Confirmation screen appears.
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop
DVD
VHS
1:00 XP
:
5/ 5 Fri 6:11 PM
Off
Drive
On
New Scheduled Recording
Mode Check
A
Recording” and
press [ENTER].
≥Recording stops and the scheduled recording is deleted. (Daily
and weekly schedules remain and scheduled recording will
start as programmed.)
∫ Release program from recording standby
[1] Press [SCHEDULE].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the program and press
[SUB MENU].
[3] Press [3, 4] to select “Schedule set to Off” and
press [ENTER].
Cancelled icon is displayed in left column.
Schedule
List
Remain
No Channel Date
01 4
5/ 6 Sat
DV
VH
On
6:10
New Sche
≥Be sure to select “Schedule set to On.” in step 3 before the
scheduled time to put the program on recording standby.
Note
≥When a scheduled recording program cannot start (no tape, etc.),
“Schedule set to On.” is cancelled one minute before the start time.
(If a daily or weekly scheduled recording program cannot start, the
following daily or weekly scheduled recording will not be affected.)
[VHS]
Scheduled Recording
M6VP&PC.book 29 ページ
B
Icon explanations (A)
¥: Currently recording
W: Programs are overlapped. Recording of the program with the
later start time starts when the earlier program finishes
recording.
: Scheduled recording standby is cancelled. Recording will not
start at the scheduled time.
n: You stopped a weekly or daily scheduled recording. The icon
disappears when the next scheduled recording starts.
F: The disc was full. (not enough space)
: The TV program may not be recorded due to copy-protect. (disc)
X: Recording stopped (Dirty disc or tape, etc.)
Check (B)
OK:
Recordable (disc)
# (Date): The last day of daily or weekly recording. (disc)
!:
It may not be possible to record because:
≥the disc is write-protected.
≥there is no more space left (disc).
≥the number of possible titles has reached its
maximum.
≥the tape tab is broken off.
≥there is no tape/the tape is full.
≥the remaining tape time is not calculated.
Overlap: When the date and time overlap with another scheduled
recording, only a part of the program can be recorded.
--:
All other cases (tape)
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the program.
≥You may also select program by inputting a 2-digit number
using the numeric buttons.
e.g.:
“5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
≥Press [2, 1] to move to the preceding or following page.
[3] Press [¢, CANCEL] or [CH, ADD/DLT] to delete,
∫ Auto SP/EP mode
≥You cannot delete programs that are currently recording.
[VHS]
If, at the beginning of a scheduled recording, there is not enough
tape remaining to complete the recording, the SP/EP function will
automatically run the tape at EP speed for recording. This ensures
that the entire program will be recorded. If EP mode is not enough to
stretch the remaining tape to fit the whole program you will not be
able to record the whole TV program.
or press [ENTER] to change.
≥The scheduled recording setting screen appears.
[4]
If you pressed [ENTER] in step 3,
Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to change and press [ENTER].
[5] Press [RETURN].
Scheduled recording
1st program
(30 min)
30 min at SP
2nd program (60 min)
15 min
at SP
45 min
at EP
Video tape (e.g.: 60-minute cassette)
≥It is not possible to automatically activate VP mode.
≥The tape length must be set correctly. (l 58)
≥Some tapes may not work correctly.
≥If the recording mode changes from SP to EP during a scheduled
recording, some picture distortion occurs at that point.
29
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 30 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Playing discs
∫ When a menu screen appears on the TV
[VCD]
Press the numeric buttons to select an item.
e.g.:
“5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select an item and press [ENTER].
≥You can sometimes use the numeric buttons to select an item.
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
Í
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
DRIVE
SELECT
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
Numeric
buttons
:, 9
∫
CH
DELETE
RESET
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
REW
STOP
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
TIME SLIP
FF
PLAY
CM SKIP
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
AUDIO
A
REC
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
Other buttons used to operate menus
Read the disc’s instructions for further details about operation.
ADD/DLT
CH
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
6, 5
1
;
CM SKIP
3, 4, 2, 1
2;, ;1
ENTER
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
Preparation
≥Turn on the TV and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to the unit.
Playing discs
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on.
Insert a disc. (l 22)
Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
Press [1, PLAY].
≥The disc tray closes and play begins.
(The unit takes some time to read the disc before play starts.)
≥Playback starts from the most recently recorded title.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Playback starts from the beginning of the disc.
[DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]
Note
≥ If “ ” appears on the TV, the operation is prohibited by the unit
or disc.
Selecting recorded titles to play
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[1] Press [DIRECT
NAVIGATOR].
[2] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to
select the title you
want to watch and
press [ENTER].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Title View
DVD-RAM
08
07
10 10/23 Mon
--
--
Previous
---
8 10/23 Mon
--
Page 02/02
Next
Select Previous
Next
SUB MENU
≥Play starts.
≥You can also select titles by
entering a 2-digit number with the numeric buttons.
e.g.:
“5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
≥If you enter a number larger than the total number of titles, the
last title is selected.
≥“To show other pages” (l 38)
Play
∫ To clear the title list
Press [RETURN].
For your reference
≥Direct Navigator screen icons
: Title protected
: Copy-protected so it was not recorded
t: Unable to play
¥: Currently recording
: Title with “One time only recording” restriction (l 68, CPRM)
Quick View (Play t1.3)
[RAM]
∫ To stop play
Press [∫, STOP].
The play speed can be increased without distorting the audio.
The stopped position is memorized.
Resume play function
Press [1, PLAY] to restart from this position.
≥[VCD] Depending on the disc, resume play function may not be
effective.
≥The stopped position is cleared when:
- You press [∫, STOP] several times.
- You open the tray.
- [DVD-A] [VCD] [CD] You turn the unit off.
≥The screen saver on the right may appear when Screen saver
you stop play. Press [∫, STOP] again and you
can use the unit’s tuner to watch TV.
[DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]
Press and hold [1, PLAY].
∫ To pause play
Press [;, PAUSE]. (Press again to restart play.)
Note
≥The unit stops playing a disc when scheduled recording starts.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Press [1, PLAY] when you wish to start playing the disc while
recording (l 26, “Playing from the beginning of the title you are
recording–Chasing playback”). [RAM]
30
RQTV0134
During Play
DVD-RAM
DVD-RAM
Play
Play x1.3
∫ To return to normal speed
Press [1, PLAY].
Fast forward and rewind–SEARCH
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
e.g.; [RAM]
During Play
Press [6, SLOW/SEARCH] or [5,
SLOW/SEARCH].
≥There are 5 search speeds. Each press
increases the search speed. ([+R] [+RW] Up to 3 speeds)
≥Press [1, PLAY] to restart playback.
DVD-RAM
• • • •
t2
Stereo
For your reference
≥Sound is output only in the first level of fast forward. In the case of
DVD-Audio (except motion picture parts), CD and MP3, it is output
in all levels.
≥Depending on the disc, search may not be possible.
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Skipping
Skipping the specified time — Time Slip
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
During play or while paused
Press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP].
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
Slow-motion play
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only) [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
While paused
Press [6, SLOW/SEARCH]
or
[5, SLOW/SEARCH].
≥When slow motion play is continued for about 5 minutes it pauses
automatically (excluding [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD]).
≥There are 5 play speeds. Each press increases the play speed.
≥Press [1, PLAY] to restart playback.
≥[VCD] Forward direction ([5, SLOW/SEARCH]) only.
Frame-by-frame viewing
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only) [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
While paused
Press [2;] ([2]) or [;1] ([1]).
≥Each press shows the next or previous frame.
≥Press and hold to change in succession forward or backward.
≥Press [1, PLAY] to restart playback.
≥[VCD] Forward direction ([;1], [1]) only.
Direct play
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
You can play from the title, chapter or track you select.
During Play
Press the numeric buttons to select an item.
e.g.:
“5”:
“15”:
[0] )[5]
[1] )[5]
Playing discs
M6VP&PC.book 31 ページ
[CD] (MP3, JPEG and TIFF disc only)
“5”: [0] )[0] )[5]
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[1]
During play
Press [TIME SLIP].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the time and press
[ENTER].
Play skips to the specified time.
≥Each time you press [3, 4] the time increases [3] or decreases
[4] by 1 minute intervals. (Press and hold for 10-minute intervals.)
Changing audio during play
Press [AUDIO] to select the audio type.
≥You can select audio types depend on the recording medium.
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Stereo# Mono L# Mono R
^--------------------------------------}
e.g.: [RAM]
“Stereo” is
selected.
DVD-RAM
Play
Stereo
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [When playing an SAP broadcast recorded on DVDRAM, DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format)]
MAIN Audio () SAP Audio
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
This allows you to change items like the audio channel number and
the sound track language. (l 36)
Soundtrack
1 ENG
Î Digital 3/2.1ch
e.g.: English is the selected language. [DVD-V]
[VHS]
Stereo > Mono L > Mono R > No display (Normal audio track)
^------------------------------------------------------------}
Note
≥If you cannot change the audio type when you have used only an
optical digital cable for connection, set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM”
(l 57). Alternatively, you may connect to an amplifier with an
Audio/Video cable and change the input on the amplifier to suit the
connection.
[DVD-A]
A group number can be specified while the screen saver (l 30) is
displayed.
e.g.:
“5”: [5]
≥This works only when stopped (screen saver is displayed) with
some discs.
≥Playing bonus groups
Some discs contain bonus groups. If a password screen appears
after selecting a group, enter the password with the numeric
buttons and press [ENTER]. For the password, refer to the disc’s
jacket, etc.
CM Skip
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
You can skip approximately 1 minute with one press.
During play
Press [CM SKIP].
Create chapters
[RAM]
During play
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
≥Press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP] to skip to the start of a chapter.
≥You cannot activate this function when you are carrying out
transfer (copy).
31
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 32 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Using menus to play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
∫ Using the tree screen to find a group (l 33)
DVD/VHS
∫ To show other groups
POWER
POWER
DRIVE
SELECT
Press [:] (Prev.) or [9] (Next) to show other pages.
≥After listing all the tracks in one group, the list for the next group
appears.
VOLUME
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
Numeric
buttons
RESET
:, 9
ADD/DLT
CH
DELETE
FF
REW
SKIP/INDEX
PAUSE
PLAY
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
ENTER
SUB MENU
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
FUNCTIONS
≥You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) on this unit by
making folders as shown below. However depending on how
you create the disc (writing software), play may not be in the
order you numbered the folders.
≥English alphabetical characters and Arabic numerals are
displayed correctly. Other characters may not be displayed
correctly.
≥When the highest level folders are “DCIM” folders, they are
displayed first on the tree.
Structure of MP3 folders
Prefix with 3-digit numbers
in the order you want to play
them.
RETURN
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] or [RETURN].
SLOW/SEARCH
STOP
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
∫ To exit the file list
CH
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
Tree
001
Structure of still pictures
(JPEG/TIFF)
Files inside a folder are
displayed in the order they
were updated or taken.
Tree
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
001 Group
STATUS
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
001
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
002 Group
003 Group
2
Preparation
≥Turn on the TV and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to the unit.
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
Playing discs which contain both MP3
and still pictures
[CD]
The screen shown below is displayed when you insert a disc
containing MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF).
Press [ENTER].
Playback mode is set to MP3.
To display pictures,
please select Pictures Menu from FUNCTIONS.
∫ To play MP3
Refer to “Playing MP3”. (l below)
∫ To play still pictures
ENTER
Refer to “To show Pictures Menu”. (l 33)
Playing MP3
[CD]
The unit plays MP3 files recorded on CD-R/RW designed for audio
recording that are finalized (l 68) on a computer. Files are treated
as tracks and folders are treated as groups.
[1]
During stop or play
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥The file list appears.
Selected Group No. and Name
G:
The Group Number
T:
Track Number in the Group
Total:
Selected Track Number/
Total Track Number
Menu
G
T
Total
1
1
No.
Group
1 : MP3_MUSIC
Total
Track
1
001 Both Ends Freezing
Tree
1/ 24
No.
0 – 9
Prev.
Next
ENTER
Page 001/016
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the track and press
[ENTER].
32
RQTV0134
≥Play starts on the selected track.
≥“
” indicates the track currently playing.
≥You can also directly select the track with the numeric buttons.
e.g.:
“6”: [0] )[0] )[6]
“10”: [0] )[1] )[0]
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3
003 Folder
004 Folder
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
Order of play
002 Folder
Order of play
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
Regarding MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
≥Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended
formats) and Joliet
≥Maximum number of files (tracks) and folders (groups)
recognizable: 999 files (tracks) and 99 folders (groups)
≥This unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of
the disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.
≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders (groups) and some files (tracks) may not
display or be playable.
≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders (groups) may not play in the order you
numbered them.
≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
≥Depending on the recording, some items may not be playable.
Regarding MP3
≥File format: MP3
Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
≥Bit rates: 32 kbps to 320 kbps
≥Sampling frequency: 16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1
kHz/48 kHz
≥This unit is not compatible with ID3 tags.
Regarding still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
≥File format: JPEG, TIFF (non-compressed RGB chunky format)
Files must have the extension “.jpg”, “.JPG”, “.tif” and “.TIF”.
≥Number of pixels: 34 k 34 to 6144 k 4096
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
≥Operation may take time to complete when playing TIFF format
still pictures.
≥Motion JPEG is not supported.
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
∫ Using the tree screen to find a group
[1]
While the file list is displayed (l 32)
Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
Tree
Menu
G
T
Total
1
1
3
1/ 24
No.
0 – 9
3
ENTER
MP3_MUSIC
001 My favorite
001 Brazillian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 PC Files
005 Japanese pops
006 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
002 Standard Number
001 Piano solo
002 Vocal
G 1/ 15
Selected Group Number/Total
Group Number
≥If the group has no track, “– –”
is displayed as group number.
∫ To return to the file list
Press [RETURN].
No. 100/123
[CD] [with MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)]
FUNCTIONS
CD(MP3/JPEG)
Menu
Playback Mode: MP3
Program
Multimedia content
Music and pictures on disc.
Please select playback mode.
Pictures
[CD] [with still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) only]
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Pictures Menu screen
Previous
Folder
08 8
5/22 Mon
Start Slideshow
Slide Interval
Picture View
08 8 5/22 Mon
Page 01/01
≥Make sure that Pictures Menu screen appears by following the
steps “To show Pictures Menu”.
You can display still pictures one by one with a constant interval.
[1] Select “Folder” with [3]
and press [ENTER].
[2] Select the folder with [3,
4] and press [ENTER].
MP3 Music
Folder
Pictures Menu Picture View
CD (JPEG)
∫ To select the still pictures in another folder
Menu
Pictures Menu
CD (JPEG)
You can display still pictures one by one with constant interval.
To Change the display timing
[1] Select “Slide Interval” with [3, 4] in step 2 and press [ENTER].
[2] Press [2, 1] to select the desired timing (0 to 30 seconds) and
press [ENTER].
To show Pictures Menu
∫ To exit the Pictures Menu
Date 5/22/2006
≥Make sure that Pictures Menu screen appears by following the
steps “To show Pictures Menu”.
[1] Select “Folder” with [3]
and press [SUB MENU].
[2] Select “Start
Slideshow” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
≥The file list for the selected group appears.
Press [:] (Previous) or [9]
(Next) to show other pages.
≥You can also press [3, 4, 2, 1] to
select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER] to show other pages.
5/23 10:15 PM
∫ Start Slideshow/Slide Interval
[2] Press [3, 4] to select a group and press
[ENTER].
∫ To show other pages
To show the picture properties
[1] Press [STATUS] twice.
≥Press [STATUS] again, the
properties disappear.
Shooting Date
≥A folder which has no MP3 files is indicated in black. You
cannot select groups with no MP3 files.
≥Press [2, 1] to jump layers in the tree screen.
[1] Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Menu” with [3,
4] and press [ENTER].
[3] Select “Pictures” with
[3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
≥To return the picture to its original size, repeat step [1] and
press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step [2] and then press
[ENTER].
≥When zooming in, the still picture may be cut off.
≥The enlargement information will not be stored.
≥The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still
pictures smaller than 640k480 pixels.
Using menus to play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
M6VP&PC.book 33 ページ
ASelected folder no./Total folder no.
BYou cannot select folders that
contain no compatible files.
AB
Pictures Menu Select Folder
CD (JPEG)
05_12_2006
F
1/1
ENTER
Next
Play
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] or
[RETURN].
Playing still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
≥Make sure that Pictures Menu screen appears by following the
steps “To show Pictures Menu”.
Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a still picture you want to
watch and press [ENTER].
≥You can also select a still picture by entering a 3-digit with the
numeric buttons.
e.g.:
“5”: [0] )[0] )[5]
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]
≥You can watch the still pictures in order by pressing [2]
(previous) or [1] (next).
To rotate a still picture
[1] Press [SUB MENU].
[2] Select “Rotate Right” or “Rotate Left” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
≥Rotation information will not be stored;
- [CD] When Still pictures
- When disc is protected
- When played on other equipment
- When copying pictures
To zoom in/out
[1] Press [SUB MENU].
[2] Select “Zoom in” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
Rotate Right
Rotate Left
Zoom in
ENTER
33
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 34 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Playing a video cassette
[1] Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on.
[2] Select VHS side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[3] Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. the AV
input) on the TV.
[4] Insert a recorded video cassette. (l 22)
[5] Press [1, PLAY].
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
Í
DRIVE
SELECT
:, 9
∫
CH
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
REW
STOP
PAUSE
TRACKING/
V-LOCK, r, s
ADD/DLT
CH
RESET
6, 5
FF
1
;
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
SCHEDULE
TIONS
FU N C
ENTER
AUDIO
A
REC
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS
F Rec
STATUS
Fast-forward/Rewind
While stopped
Press [6] (backward)/[5]
∫ To stop play
Press [∫, STOP].
Notes
≥When the unit is on standby, an inserted video cassette can be
played back by pressing [1, PLAY].
≥When the tape reaches its end, the unit automatically rewinds it to
the beginning. This function does not work during scheduled
recording, fast-forwarding and specified stop recording.
≥Jet Search, cue, review or slow playback will be automatically
canceled after 10 minutes, and pause after 5 minutes.
≥When viewing a still picture or during slow playback, the picture
that appears in VP mode may be distorted.
≥When playing back a tape which was recorded on another VCR, it
may be necessary to adjust the tracking (l 35). In some cases the
picture quality may still be inferior. This is due to format
constraints.
To perform a Higher Speed Rewind
(forward).
During play
Tap or keep pressing [6] (backward)/[5]
(forward).
≥If you keep pressing these buttons, normal playback restarts by
releasing them.
≥Tap [1, PLAY] to restart normal playback.
Jet Search
During play
Tap [6] (backward)/[5]
(forward) twice. You can
increase Cue/Review search speed.
≥Press [1, PLAY] to restart normal playback.
≥You can select search speed to view the recorded picture. (l 58)
≥The picture recorded in EP or VP mode may be distorted if it is
played at approx. 35 times speed. A vertical scroll may occur. It is
not a malfunction but if it happens, change to approx. 27 times
speed.
≥The picture may not be in color or may be distorted depending on
the TV.
Slow
During play
Press and hold [;, PAUSE] for about 2 seconds or
more.
≥Press [1, PLAY] to restart normal playback.
RQTV0134
∫ To pause play
Jet Rewind
Cue/Review
34
≥Play starts automatically if you insert a video cassette with the
tab removed.
Press [;, PAUSE]. (Press again to restart play.)
PLAY
SUB MENU
µ
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
6JET REW
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
Press [6JET REW].
≥Depending on the tape or an operating condition, the rewind speed
may change somewhat.
≥The tape counter is reset to “0:00.00” when the tape is rewound to
the beginning.
≥Depending on the tape, this function may not work.
S-VHS Quasi Playback (SQPB)
It is also possible to play back tapes recorded in the S-VHS system.
≥Some picture noise may occur depending on the type of tape used.
≥It is not possible to fully obtain the high resolution that S-VHS is
capable of.
≥It is not possible to record in the S-VHS system with the unit.
Repeat Playback
During play or while stopped
Keep pressing [1, PLAY]
for about 5 or more
seconds.
≥At the end of the program, the tape rewinds to the beginning of the
program and plays it again (it only works if there is at least 5
seconds blank space at the end of the program). This repeats until
you cancel it.
∫ To restart normal playback
Press [1, PLAY].
∫ To stop play
Press [∫, STOP].
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Adjusting the playback picture
∫ Manual tracking
The unit usually makes tracking adjustments, but you may need to
do it manually if noise appears on a tape recorded on other
equipment.
During play
Various on-screen display indications
On-screen display below appears during play on VHS.
To see these displays, set the “Status Messages” item in the “Setup”
to “Automatic”. (l 58)
Press [STATUS].
The time and operation details appear on the screen.
1
2
3 4
Press [TRACKING/V-LOCK, r] or
[TRACKING/V-LOCK, s].
VHS
Mono L
0:00.22
SP 1
Repeat until the noise disappears.
5
6
Playing a video cassette
M6VP&PC.book 35 ページ
∫ Vertical locking adjustment
Adjust the vertical synchronization to stop the picture from jiggling
while paused.
While paused
Press [TRACKING/V-LOCK, r] or
[TRACKING/V-LOCK, s].
1
Current drive
Repeat until the jiggling stops.
2
Audio indicators
The Left (Mono L) and Right (Mono R) indicators show
which sound mode is selected as follows:
Stereo:
Stereo indicator appears.
Mono L:
The Mono L indicator appears.
Mono R:
The Mono R indicator appears.
Normal:
Neither the L nor R indicator appears.
3
Operation status display
4
Shows the tape counter and remaining tape time
Pressing [STATUS] once makes the on-screen display
appear. After that, press the button repeatedly to change
the display as follows:
No display > Tape counter > Remaining tape time
^-----------------------------------------------------------------}
≥Press [¢, CANCEL] to reset the tape counter (elapsed
time) to “0:00.00”. The tape counter is automatically reset
to “0:00.00” when inserting a video cassette.
≥The remaining time is approximate. It will be incorrect if
you set the wrong tape time in “Select Tape Length” in the
“Setup” and if the tape is of poor quality. (l 58)
5
Cassette-in indicator
Shows whether you have inserted a video cassette.
6
Recording mode indicator (l 24)
∫ To return to auto tracking
Press both [TRACKING/V-LOCK, r] and [TRACKING/V-LOCK, s]
simultaneously.
∫ To remove the noise from a paused picture
Start slow play, then adjust the tracking.
Notes
≥This function may not work with some TV models and tapes.
≥You can also adjust the tracking and vertical synchronization with
[CH, W, X] on the main unit.
VHS Index Search System (VISS)
The unit automatically records special index signals on the tape
every time a recording is started. The index search function makes
use of these index signals to let you find the beginning of a desired
program quickly and easily.
∫ Index signals are recorded in the following cases.
≥When a recording is started by pressing [¥, REC].
≥When scheduled recording is started.
Preparation
≥Select the unit viewing channel on the TV.
≥Select VHS side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
≥Insert a recorded video cassette.
While stopped or during normal play
Note
≥The on-screen display may be distorted depending on the
playback tape or the input signal.
Press [: ] or [ 9].
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
∫ To cancel the index search
Press [∫, STOP].
Notes
≥You can search up to 20 index signals can be searched for in both
directions.
≥When you press either one of the buttons too much, you can
control the number of skips by pressing the opposite button.
≥The figure on the display decreases by 1 each time an index signal
is located.
≥This feature may not work correctly if the index signals are too
close together. Make recordings of at least 5 minutes.
35
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 36 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Using on-screen menus/FUNCTIONS window and Status messages
Using on-screen menus
1 Disc menu-Setting disc content
DVD/VHS
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[VCD]
POWER
POWER
DRIVE
SELECT
RESET
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
Soundtrack
VOLUME
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear.
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
SCHEDULE
7 8 9
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Select the audio and language. (See [B] Audio attributes)
CH
CM SKIP
ADD/DLT
Subtitle
DISPLAY
ENTER
RESET
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
TIONS
FU N C
3, 4, 1
ENTER
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(Only disc that contain subtitle on/off information)
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (See [A] Sound
track/Subtitle language)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
≥If the subtitles overlap the closed captions recorded on discs,
turn the subtitles off.
STATUS
Audio channel [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
∫ Common procedures
“Changing audio during play” (l 31)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
Angle [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Preparation
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
Still-P (Still picture) [DVD-A]
Change the number to select an angle.
[1] Press [DISPLAY].
Disc
Play
Video
Audio
Other
Soundtrack
1
Î Digital 2/0ch
Subtitle
Off
Stereo
Audio channel
Menu
Item
Setting
[2] Select a menu with [3, 4] and press [1].
[3] Select an item with [3, 4] and press [1].
[4] Select a setting with [3, 4].
≥Different operations are required depending on settings.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
∫ To exit the screen
Press [DISPLAY].
For your reference
≥The screens depend on the disc contents.
≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped, etc.) and
the type of software you are playing, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.
Selects the play method for still pictures.
Slide Show: Plays according to the default order on the disc.
Page:
Select the still picture number and play.
RANDOM: Plays in random order.
Return:
Returns to the default still picture on the disc.
PBC (Playback control) [VCD] (l 68)
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.
[A] Sound track/Subtitle language
ENG: English
DAN: Danish
THA: Thai
FRA: French
POR: Portuguese
POL: Polish
DEU: German
RUS: Russian
CES: Czech
ITA: Italian
JPN: Japanese
SLK: Slovak
ESP: Spanish
CHI: Chinese
HUN: Hungarian
Finnish
NLD: Dutch
KOR: Korean
FIN:
¢:
Others
SVE: Swedish
MAL: Malay
NOR: Norwegian VIE: Vietnamese
[B] Audio attributes
LPCM/PPCM/Î Digital/DTS/MPEG: Signal type
k (kHz):
Sampling frequency
b (bit):
Number of bits
ch (channel):
Number of channels
For your reference
≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot
make a change when there is no recording.
≥Some discs allow changes to sound tracks, subtitles, and angles
only by using the disc’s setup menus.
1 Play menu-Change play sequence
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[VCD] [CD]
Repeat play
This function works only when the elapsed play time is
displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items
that can be selected will differ.
≥All
≥Chapter
36
RQTV0134
[VCD] [CD] (excluding MP3 discs)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Group
[DVD-A] [CD] (MP3 discs only)
≥Playlists [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Title
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Track
[DVD-A] [VCD] [CD]
Select “Off” to cancel.
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
1 Video menu-Change picture quality
FUNCTIONS window
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[VCD]
By using the FUNCTIONS window you can access the main
functions quickly and easily.
Picture
[1]
To select the picture mode during play
Normal: Default setting
Soft:
Soft picture with fewer video artifacts
Fine:
Details are sharper
Cinema: Mellows movies, enhances detail in dark scenes.
DNR
Reduces noise and picture degradation.
On()Off
°Progressive (l 68)
Select “On” to enable progressive output.
≥Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.
≥When progressive output is on, closed captions cannot be
displayed.
On()Off
°Transfer (When “Progressive” is set to “On”)
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of material being played (l 68, “Film and Video”).
Auto1 (normal):
Detects 24 frame-per-second film content and
appropriately converts it.
Auto2: Compatible with 30 frame-per-second film content in
addition to 24 frame-per-second film content.
Video: Select when the video content is distorted by using
Auto1 and Auto2.
While stopped
FUNCTIONS
≥Functions displayed depend
on the type of disc.
° Only when you have selected “480p” in “TV Type” (l 18).
1 Audio menu-Change sound effect
Program
Copy
[2] Select an item with
[3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
Other Functions
ENTER
RETURN
≥If you select “Other
Functions”, press [3, 4] to select an item and press [ENTER].
∫ To exit the FUNCTIONS window
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Status messages
Status messages appear on the TV when operating the unit, to show
you what operation was performed and what condition the unit is in.
Press [STATUS] to change the information
displayed.
The display changes each time you press the button.
For example,
Line-in NR (Only when IN1, IN2 or DV is selected)
Reduces video tape noise during transfer (copy).
Depending on the software, jittering may occur.
Automatic:
Noise reduction only works on picture input from a
video tape.
On:
Noise reduction works for any video input.
Off:
Noise reduction is off. Select when you want to record
input as is.
No Disc
No Disc
Press [FUNCTIONS].
(2)
VHS Rec.
(4)
(5)
5/22
π T1
(1)
DVD-RAM
Rec.
Play
Stereo
(3)
Using on-screen menus/FUNCTIONS window and Status messages
M6VP&PC.book 37 ページ
(6)
10:15 PM π Remain
1:34 SP
π T2
00:05.14 XP
00:00.10 SP
(8)
(7)
DVD-RAM
Rec.
Play
Stereo
VHS Rec.
No display
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
V. Surround Sound
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
(Only for Dolby Digital with 2.0 or more channels)
Enjoy a surround-sound effect if you are using 2 front speakers
(L/R) only.
Natural()Emphasis()Off
^----------------------------------------J
Notes
≥Turn V. Surround Sound off if it causes distortion.
≥V. Surround Sound does not work for SAP recordings.
Dialog Enhancer
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a center
channel)
The volume of the center channel is raised to make dialog easier
to hear.
On()Off
∫ Display examples
(1) Current medium
(2) Current recording or play status, input channel
≥Shows the current state of the unit and the input channel.
(3) Audio type (l 25, 31)
(4) Other drive mode
(5) The current date and time
(6) Available recording time and recording mode
(e.g.: “1:34 SP” indicates 1 hour and 34 minutes in SP mode)
≥Disc remaining time may slightly differ between different
models.
(7) Elapsed play time
(8) Recording time
≥Shows recording time, recording mode and a rough guide to
how much space has been used for recording on the disc.
1 Other menu-Change the display position
Position
To change the display position
1 (Standard) –5:
The higher the setting the lower the screen moves.
37
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 38 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Editing titles/chapters
Editing titles/Chapters and playing
chapters
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
DRIVE
SELECT
:, 9
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
Note
≥Once deleted, divided or shortened, the title cannot be restored to
its original state. Make certain before proceeding.
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
ADD/DLT
CH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
REW
PAUSE
1
CM SKIP
;
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
ENTER
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
Properties
Edit Title
View Chapters
≥After this operation, follow the desired operation.
∫ To stop in the middle
Press [RETURN].
RETURN
CREATE
Delete Title
[3] Press [SUB MENU].
[4] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item
and press [ENTER].
SCHEDULE
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
e.g.; [RAM]
≥“To show other pages” (l below)
FF
PLAY
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
[1] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[2] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a desired
title.
DELETE
RESET
STOP
Preparation
≥Release protection (disc l 53, cartridge l 53). [RAM]
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
CH
RETURN
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
For your reference
≥When the title is protected (l 39), some items are not accessible.
Release the protection to access the inaccessible items. [RAM]
Title operations
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] and the list of titles recorded (Title
View) is shown. You can play and edit a desired title.
For your reference
≥You cannot edit during recording or transferring (copying), etc.
≥You can create a Top Menu using “Create DVD Top Menu” (l 55).
Recording or editing on the disc may delete the menu. In that case,
create the menu again. [+RW]
≥Management information is recorded in unused sections when you
edit discs. The available space these discs decreases each time
you edit their contents. [+R] [+R]DL]
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
- Title:
99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)
- Chapter: Approximately 1000
([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approximately 254)
(Depends on the state of recording.)
Title/Chapter
Programs are recorded as a single title consisting of one chapter.
Title
Chapter
Start
End
You can divide a title into multiple chapters. [RAM]
(l 31, “Create chapters”, l 40 “Create Chapter”)
Title
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
∫ Delete Title
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(Multiple editing is possible. l below)
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Editing titles/Chapters and playing
chapters”.
Once title is deleted using this
procedure, it cannot be retrieved.
Check the title carefully before
erasing to ensure it isn’t one you
want to keep.
e.g.; [RAM]
Delete Title
Date
Channel
≥Titles are divided into chapters about 5 minutes after finalizing
(l 55). [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] (8 minutes [+R] [+R]DL])
Start
12:00 AM
0 : 58(SP)
Corresponding playlist's chapters will be deleted.
[4] Select “Delete Title”
Delete
Cancel
with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[5] Select “Delete” with [2] and press [ENTER].
ENTER
For your reference
≥The disc’s available recording time may not increase after erasing
short titles.
≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL
does not increase when you delete titles.
≥The available recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or
+RW increases when the last recorded title is deleted. (The
recording space may increase slightly when other titles are deleted.)
∫ Properties
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Editing titles/Chapters and playing
chapters”.
Title information (e.g., date and
time) is shown.
≥You can change the order of chapters and create a playlist
(l 41). [RAM]
10/ 23/2007 Mon
12
Time remaining
after deletion
[4] Select “Properties”
with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
Properties
Football
Number
Date
Channel
01
Start
1/ 1/2007 Mon Rec. Length
12
1:02 PM
1:00(SP)
ENTER
Various operations
∫ To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP] to show other
pages.
∫ Multiple editing
38
RQTV0134
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;, PAUSE]. (Repeat)
A check mark appears. Press [;, PAUSE] again to cancel.
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
[6] Select “Exit” with [3,
4] and press [ENTER].
[7] Select “Delete” with
[2] and press
[ENTER].
∫ Edit Title
You can perform various kinds of title editing.
Preparation
≥Release protection (disc l 53, cartridge l 53). [RAM]
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] and use [3, 4, 2,
1] to select a desired title.
≥“To show other pages” l 38
≥“Multiple editing” l 38
[2] Press [SUB MENU].
e.g.; [RAM]
[3] Select “Edit Title” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[4] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item
and press [ENTER].
Cancel Protection
≥The editing screen for the selected item
appears.
Divide Title
Title Name
Set Protection
Shorten Title
Change Thumbnail
Press [RETURN].
∫ To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
1 Title Name
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.
[4] Select “Title Name” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
Refer to “Entering text”. (l 51)
1 Set Protection/Cancel Protection
[RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] (“Multiple editing” l 38)
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.
[4] Select “Set Protection” or “Cancel Protection”
with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
DVD-RAM
Yes
Set up Protection:
The padlock mark
appears.
07
No
10 10/23 Mon
ENTER
--
Cancel Protection
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
DVD-RAM
Cancel title protection.
Yes
Cancel Protection:
The padlock mark
disappears.
07
No
10 10/23 Mon
ENTER
--
For your reference
Titles will be erased even if they are protected if you format the disc
with DVD Management (l 53).
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.
You can remove unnecessary parts of the title such as commercials.
(l 40, “For quicker editing”)
Start
12:00 AM
1 : 57(SP)
Corresponding playlist's chapters will be deleted.
Delete
Cancel
∫ To erase another part of the same title
After setting the point in “Start” and “End”, select “Next” in step 5 and
perform step 7, then repeat steps 5–7.
For your reference
≥You may not be able to specify start and end points within
3 seconds of each other.
≥The disc’s available recording time may not increase after erasing
short parts of titles.
1 Change Thumbnail
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.
[4] Select “Change
Thumbnail” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[5] Press [1, PLAY] to
play.
[6] Press [ENTER] at the
point you want to
display.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail
DVD-RAM
;
08
Change
Exit
0:00.00
Start play and select
the thumbnail position.
Change
0:00.00
ENTER
(l 40, “For quicker editing”)
≥To change to another point in the same title:
- Select “Change” with [3, 4] and press [1, PLAY] and then
repeat step 6.
≥The thumbnail picture will be changed at this point.
1 Divide Title
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.
You can divide a selected title into two. You must be careful when
dividing a title because it cannot be recovered after the procedure.
[4] Select “Divide Title”
with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[5] Press [ENTER] at the
point you want to
divide the title.
(l 40, “For quicker editing”)
≥To change the point to
divide:
- Select “Divide” with [3, 4]
and press [1, PLAY], and
then repeat steps 5 to 7.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title
DVD-RAM
;
08
Preview
Divide
Exit
0:00.05
Divide
0:00.05
ENTER
Date
Channel
Divide Title
5/ 22/2006 Mon
12
Start
12:00 AM
Once divided, this title
cannot be recombined.
Divide
Cancel
[6] Select “Exit” with [3,
4] and press [ENTER].
[7] Select “Divide” with [2] and press [ENTER].
1 Shorten Title
[4] Select “Shorten Title”
with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[5] Press [ENTER] at the
start point and end
point of the section
you want to erase.
5/ 22/2006 Mon
12
Time remaining
after deletion
[7] Select “Exit” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
You can prevent accidental erasure of titles by setting and canceling
the write-protection.
Set title protection.
Date
Channel
You can change the image to be shown as a thumbnail picture in the
Title View.
∫ To return to the previous screen
Set Protection
Shorten Title
Editing titles/chapters
M6VP&PC.book 39 ページ
∫ To check the division point
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Shorten Title
DVD-RAM
08
Play
Start
End
Next
Exit
0:43.21
ENTER
≥The title is divided at that point.
Start
End
- -:- -.- -
- -:- -.- -
By selecting “Preview” in step 5 and pressing [ENTER], play will
begin from 10 seconds prior to the division point to 10 seconds after
the division point.
For your reference
≥The divided titles retain the name of the original title. They also
retain the CPRM property (l 68) of the original.
≥Video and audio just before and after the division point will be
momentarily cut out.
≥It is not possible to carry out “Divide” in the following cases:
- When the resulting part(s) are extremely short.
- When the total number of titles is more than 99.
39
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 40 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Editing titles/chapters
1 Delete Chapter
DVD/VHS
[RAM] (“Multiple editing” l 38)
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “View Chapters”.
POWER
POWER
VOLUME
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
DRIVE
SELECT
Numeric
buttons
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
ADD/DLT
CH
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
REW
STOP
∫
PAUSE
CM SKIP
SUB MENU
TIONS
FU N C
ENTER
1 Create Chapter
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “View Chapters”.
PLAY
SCHEDULE
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
DELETE
FF
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
[6] Select “Create Chapter” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[7] Press [ENTER] at the point you want to divide.
(l below, “For quicker editing”)
≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter
DVD-RAM
FUNCTIONS
08
PLAY
Create
RETURN
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
[6] Select “Delete Chapter” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[7] Select “Delete” with [2] and press [ENTER].
CH
RESET
:, 9
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
CREATE
RETURN
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
Exit
0:43.21
[8] Select “Exit” with [4] and press [ENTER].
Note
≥A short portion of the recording just after the creation point may be
lost.
Chapter operations
∫ View Chapters
[1] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] and use [3, 4, 2,
1] to select a desired title.
≥“To show other pages” l 38
[2] Press [SUB MENU].
[3] Select “View Chapters” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[4] Select a desired chapter with
[3, 4, 2, 1].
≥To start play l Press [ENTER].
≥To edit l Follow the steps below.
e.g.; [RAM]
Delete Chapter
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
View Titles
For your reference
≥The divided titles retain the name of the original title. They also
retain the CPRM property (l 68) of the original.
≥It is not possible to carry out “Create” when the resulting part(s) are
extremely short.
1 Combine Chapters
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “View Chapters”.
[6] Select “Combine Chapters” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[7] Select “Combine” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥The selected chapter and next chapter are combined.
Combine Chapters
[5] Press [SUB MENU].
[6] Select a desired item with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
Selected Chapter
001
Following Chapter
002
Combine chapters.
Combine
Cancel
ENTER
1 View Titles
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “View Chapters”.
[6] Select “View Titles” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
You go back to Title View.
For quicker editing
≥Use search (l 30), Time Slip (l 31) or slow-motion (l 31) to
find the desired point.
≥Press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP] to skip to the end of a title.
40
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 41 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
[RAM]
You can create a playlist by gathering your favorite chapters (l 38)
from your recordings. You can also play and edit the created playlist.
[7] Use [2, 1] to select the position to insert the
chapter and press [ENTER].
Chapters in Playlists
001/001
Chapters in Playlists
001/001
001
Playlist
ENTER
Title
Chapter
Chapter
Title
Chapter
Chapter
Press RETURNENTER
to exit.
SUB MENU
Press RETURN to exit.
≥The chapter is registered in the playlist.
≥Repeat steps 6 to 7 to add other chapters.
≥To select other source titles, press [3] several times to return
to step 5.
Chapter
[8] Press [RETURN].
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Playlist
Chapter
Chapter
∫ To exit the screen
≥Editing playlists doesn’t modify titles.
≥Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much
capacity.
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
- Playlists: 99
- Chapters in play lists:
Approximately 1000 (Depends on the state of recording.)
≥If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the
items entered will not be recorded.
≥You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording.
Creating playlists
[RAM]
Preparation
≥Release protection. (disc l 53, cartridge l 53)
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1]
Press [RETURN].
Playing playlists
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] (Play only)
Preparation
≥Create playlists.
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1]
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Playlists” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
PLAYLISTS
Playlist View
DVD-RAM
07
08
10/23 Mon 0:30
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other
Functions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
FUNCTIONS
--
Disc Protection Off
DVD-RAM
Playback
Playlists
Program
Flexible Recording
Delete
DV Camcorder Rec.
Copy
Setup
RETURN
≥The Playlist View appears.
Playlist View
DVD-RAM
--
--
--
--
--
Create
Page 01/01
[4] Select “Create” with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press
[ENTER].
[5] Use [2, 1] to select the source title and press
[4].
Create
DVD-RAM
01
4 5/22 Mon
Source Title
01
Page 01/01
02
Page 001/001
Source Chapter
001
002
Next
∫ To stop playlist play
Press [∫, STOP]. (The Playlist View screen appears.)
Next
Play
PLAYLISTS
Next
Previous
≥Chapters are not displayed if you have not yet created a
playlist with the disc.
≥You can also select a playlist from the Playlist View by entering
a 2-digit number with the numeric buttons.
e.g.:
“5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
≥If you enter a number larger than the total number of playlists,
“Create” is selected.
≥“To show other pages” l 38
[3] Select “Playlists” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
Previous
Select
[4] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a playlist and press
[ENTER].
ENTER
--
--
Page 02/02
SUB MENU
Create
DVD Management
Other Functions
--
--
10/23 Mon 0:01
--
Previous
Play
PLAYLISTS
Editing titles/chapters/Creating, editing and playing playlist
Creating, editing and playing playlist
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To delete a playlist during play
[1] Press [DELETE].
≥A confirmation message will be displayed.
[2] Use [2] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
003
≥When you want to select all chapters in the title, use [2, 1] to
select the source title and press [ENTER], then skip to step 7.
≥Repeat steps 5 to 7 to add other titles or chapters.
For your reference
≥You can use fast-forward, fast-rewind, pause, and slow-motion
while playing chapters just as you can during normal play.
[6] Use [2, 1] to select the chapter you want to add
to a playlist and press [ENTER].
≥Press [3] to cancel.
001/001
Source Chapter
001
Insert position
002
003
Page 001/001
≥You can also create a new chapter in the source title.
Press [SUB MENU] to select “Create Chapter” and press
[ENTER] (l 40, “Create Chapter”).
41
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 42 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Creating, editing and playing playlist
∫ Properties
DVD/VHS
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Editing playlists/chapters”.
POWER
POWER
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
DRIVE
SELECT
VOLUME
[6] Select “Properties” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
Numeric
buttons
RESET
Properties
Dinosaur
ADD/DLT
CH
Number
Chapters:
DELETE
REW
SKIP/INDEX
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SUB MENU
∫ Edit
1
[RAM]
CM SKIP
You can perform various kinds of playlist editing.
AUDIO
A
REC
[1]
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
SUB MENU
5/23/2006 Tue
0:05.51
FF
PLAY
TIONS
FU N C
ENTER
Date:
Length:
ENTER
SCHEDULE
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
03
004
SLOW/SEARCH
STOP
∫
Playlist information (e.g., date and length) is shown.
CH
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Playlists” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[4] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a playlist.
≥“To show other pages” l 38 e.g.; [RAM]
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] (Properties only)
[5] Press [SUB MENU],
then select “Edit”
with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[6] Use [3, 4] to select a
desired item and
press [ENTER].
[1]
∫ To return to the previous screen
Preparation
≥Create playlists. (l 41)
≥Release protection (disc l 53, cartridge l 53). [RAM]
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
Editing playlists/chapters
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Playlists” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
≥Chapters are not displayed if you have not yet created a
playlist on the disc.
e.g.; [RAM]
[4] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a playlist.
≥“To show other pages” l 38
Delete Playlist
Delete Playlist
Create
Properties
Copy
Edit
Playlist Name
Change Thumbnail
View Chapters
Press [RETURN].
∫ To exit the screen
Press [RETURN].
1 Create
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Edit”.
[6] Select “Create” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
Refer to “Creating playlists”, steps 5–8. (l 41)
Properties
[5] Press [SUB MENU].
[6] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item
and press [ENTER].
Edit
View Chapters
∫ To return to the previous screen
1 Copy
(“Multiple editing” l 38)
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Edit”.
[6] Select “Copy” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[7] Select “Copy” with [2] and press [ENTER].
Press [RETURN].
∫ To exit the screen
Copy
Press [RETURN].
Copy this playlist?
Copy
Playlist operations
Cancel
ENTER
∫ Delete Playlist
1 Playlist Name
[RAM] (“Multiple editing” l 38)
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Editing playlists/chapters”.
[6] Select “Delete Playlist”
with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[7] Select “Delete” with
[2] and press
[ENTER].
42
RQTV0134
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Edit”.
Delete Playlist
[6] Select “Playlist Name” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
Delete playlist ?
Delete
Cancel
ENTER
≥The playlist is deleted.
≥Once a playlist has been deleted, it cannot be restored. Check
carefully before proceeding.
≥Even if you delete the playlist, the original title is not deleted.
Refer to “Entering text”. (l 51)
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
1 Change Thumbnail
≥Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Edit”.
You can change the image to be shown as a thumbnail picture in the
Playlist View.
[6] Select “Change
Thumbnail” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[7] Press [1, PLAY] to play.
[8] Press [ENTER] at the
point you want to display.
PLAYLISTS
Change Thumbnail
DVD-RAM
;
08
Change
Exit
0:00.00
Change
0:00.00
Start play and select
the thumbnail position.
ENTER
(l 40, “For quicker editing”)
≥To change to another point in the same title:
- Select “Change” with [3, 4] and press [1, PLAY], and then
repeat step 8.
[9] Select “Exit” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
≥The displayed scene is changed at this point.
Chapter operations
∫ View Chapters
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] (Play only)
You can play/edit the chapters in a playlist.
[1]
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[3] Select “Playlists” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[4] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a playlist.
≥“To show other pages” l 38
[5] Press [SUB MENU], and select “View Chapters”
with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[6] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a desired chapter.
≥You can also select a chapter from the chapter view by
entering a 3-digit number with the numeric buttons.
e.g.:
“5”: [0] )[0] )[5]
e.g.; [RAM]
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]
Add Chapter
≥If you enter a number larger than the total
Move Chapter
number of chapters, the last chapter is
Create Chapter
selected.
Combine Chapters
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify
Delete Chapter
the source titles and source chapters.
≥“To show other pages” l 38
View Playlists
[7] Press [SUB MENU].
[8] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item
and press [ENTER].
∫ To play a chapter
Press [ENTER] after step 5.
∫ To stop chapter play
Press [∫, STOP]. (The Chapter View screen appears.)
[9] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to
select the position to
insert the chapter and
press [ENTER].
≥The chapter is moved and
inserted before the
highlighted chapter.
PLAYLISTS
08
1 Move Chapter
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.
[8] Select “Move Chapter” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
0:01
002
003
sss
sss
sss
sss
sss
sss
sss
sss
sss
Previous
Page 02/02
Next
ENTER
1 Create Chapter
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.
[8] Select “Create
Chapter” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[9] Press [ENTER] at the
point you want to
divide. (l 40, “For quicker
PLAYLISTS
Create Chapter
DVD-RAM
editing”)
≥Repeat this step to divide at
other points.
08
Create
Play
Exit
0:43.21
ENTER
[10] Select “Exit” with [4] and press [ENTER].
Note
≥A short portion of the recording just after the creation point may be
lost.
For your reference
≥The divided titles retain the name of the original title. They also
retain the CPRM property (l 68) of the original.
≥It is not possible to carry out “Create” when the resulting part(s) are
extremely short.
1 Combine Chapters
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.
[8] Select “Combine Chapters” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[9] Select “Combine” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥The selected chapter and next chapter are combined.
Combine Chapters
Selected Chapter
001
Following Chapter
002
Combine chapters.
Combine
Cancel
ENTER
1 Delete Chapter
[RAM] (“Multiple editing” l 38)
≥Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
[8] Select “Delete Chapter” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[9] Select “Delete” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥Even if you delete the chapter, the original title is not deleted.
Delete Chapter
Delete chapter from playlist?
Delete
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.
Refer to “Creating playlists”, steps 5–8. (l 41)
5/22 Mon
001
1 Add Chapter
[8] Select “Add Chapter” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
Move Chapter
DVD-RAM
Creating, editing and playing playlist
M6VP&PC.book 43 ページ
Cancel
ENTER
1 View Playlists
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.
[8] Select “View Playlists” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
You go back to Playlist View.
43
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 44 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Transferring (Copying)
Before transferring (copying)
You can select from a variety of methods to transfer (copy) on the unit.
You cannot transfer (copy) titles which have been treated to prevent copying.
Direction
From
Type of transfer (copying) you want
To
Easy transferring (copying) with one button
VHS
DVD-RAM, DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVDRW(DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL or
+RW
≥When you want to transfer (copy) from the selected start
point to the end of the tape
Suitable methods
One Touch Transfer
(l 45)
Transferring (copying) with detailed settings
≥When you want to transfer (copy) from the selected start
point to the end of the tape
≥When you want to transfer (copy) for the limited amount of
time
≥When you want to transfer (copy) to fit in the remaining
capacity of the disc
GUI Transfer (l 46)
Easy transferring (copying) with one button
DVD-RAM, +RW or
DVD-RW (DVD Video
Recording format)
VHS
≥When you want to transfer (copy) a whole disc
≥When you want to transfer (copy) from the beginning of the
selected title and playlist to the end of the disc°
One Touch Transfer
(l 47)
Transferring (copying) with detailed settings
≥When you want to transfer (copy) multiple titles or playlists in
combination°
GUI Transfer (l 48)
Easy transferring (copying) with one button
DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R or +R DL
Finalized DVD-R, DVDR DL, DVD-RW (DVDVideo format), +R,
+R DL or DVD-Video
on sale that are not
copy-protected, etc.
VHS
≥When you want to transfer (copy) a whole disc
≥When you want to transfer (copy) from the beginning of the
selected title to the end of the disc
One Touch Transfer
(l 47)
Transferring (copying) with detailed settings
Cannot transfer
Easy transferring (copying) with one button
Cannot transfer
Transferring (copying) with detailed settings
VHS
≥When you want to transfer (copy) whole of a disc
≥When you want to transfer only for the specified time
DVD-Video Transfer
(l 49)
° Since you cannot create playlists on +RW, you cannot copy those. [+RW]
∫ Caution for transfer (copying) from VHS to DVD
∫ Caution for transfer (copying) from DVD to VHS
≥Copy-protected video tapes cannot be copied. Most video tapes
are copy-protected to prevent illegal copying so they cannot be
copied.
≥When a copy-protected tape is inserted, a message appears on
the display and the recording stops on the spot.
≥If a part of a tape recorded in VP mode is copied to disc, noise
may appear at the beginning of the copied part.
≥Copy-protected discs cannot be copied. Most discs are copyprotected to prevent illegal copying so they cannot be copied.
Only the following operations are allowed while transferring
(copying):
≥Stopping transfer (One Touch or GUI Transfer) by pressing and
holding [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.
≥Stopping transfer (One Touch Transfer) by pressing [∫, STOP].
When transfer (copying) is started, the following operations
also start automatically
≥“Status Messages” on Display ) “Off” (l 58) (One Touch or
GUI Transfer)
44
RQTV0134
Only the following operations are allowed while transferring
(copying):
≥Stopping transfer (One Touch or GUI Transfer) by pressing and
holding [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.
≥Stopping transfer (One Touch Transfer) by pressing [∫, STOP].
When transfer (copying) is started, the following operations
also start automatically
≥“Status Messages” on Display ) “Off” (l 58) (One Touch or
GUI Transfer)
≥Audio output when playing back DVD ) Stereo (L R) [RAM]
(One Touch or GUI Transfer)
When the playback location of the disc is recorded by the
Resume Function (l 30) and you start transferring (copying), the
transfer (copying) is executed from the top of the title which
contains the starting position of playback to the end of the disc.
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Transfer (Copying) from VHS
[1]
e.g.; [RAM]
Press and hold [“ DVD] on
the main unit for about 3
seconds or more (until
“START” on the unit’s
display terminates flashing).
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
VOLUME
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
While both DVD and VHS are stopped
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
CH
ADD/DLT
CH
DELETE
Copy
RESET
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
REW
STOP
∫
PAUSE
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
And then press [¥, REC]
FF
or [1, PLAY] on the main
unit to copy the disc with
or without finalizing.
PLAY
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
RETURN
[1, PLAY]
[
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS
E
CT
Do you want to finalize the disc after copying?
"Finalize" the disc to enable it for playback on
compatible DVD players.
Note: titles cannot be added to finalized discs.
Press REC to start copying.The DVD will
automatically be finalized after copying completes.
Press PLAY to start copying without finalizing.
Press STOP to cancel copying.
≥If you press [¥, REC] on the main unit, the disc will
automatically be finalized after copying completes.
≥If you press [1, PLAY] on the main unit, you can start
copying without finalizing.
≥If you press [∫, STOP] on the main unit, you can cancel to
copy.
F Rec
[ , REC]
, STOP]
Transferring (Copying)
M6VP&PC.book 45 ページ
REC
COPYING
DV IN
≥Check if transfer (copying) starts properly.
≥Copying is automatically completed when the tape reaches its
end or the disc becomes full.
≥If you press [¥, REC] on the main unit to finalize;
After finalizing, the discs become play-only and you can also
play them on other DVD equipment.
However, you can no longer record or edit.
≥In case the copying doesn’t complete due to shortage of
remaining time of disc or etc., the finalizing doesn’t start.
∫ To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
Press [∫, STOP] or press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds
COPYING indicator
∫ One Touch Transfer (Copying) (VHS l DVD)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can transfer (copy) programs recorded on a tape onto a disc°
with one stroke of the button.
In One Touch Transfer (Copying), programs are automatically
transferred (copied) onto the disc from the location of playback at
the time when the transfer (copying) of the tape starts.
° Available discs for transfer (copying) from tape are DVD-RAM,
non-finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL, and +RW.
Preparation
≥Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.
DVD
≥Release protection (disc l 53, cartridge l 53). [RAM]
≥Insert a disc and confirm there is sufficient empty space for
recording on it (l 22, 37).
≥Select the recording mode. (l 24)
≥When SAP broadcast program is played back on VHS, select the
audio to be recorded on disc in “Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)” in
the “Setup” menu. (l 57) [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
or more.
≥However, you cannot stop finalizing after it has started.
Notes
≥While One Touch Transfer (Copying) is activated, a scheduled
recording cannot be started.
≥When the transfer (copying) is not started or not executed, the
“COPYING” indicator blinks for about 7 seconds. Check if the unit
is properly prepared.
∫ Dividing a title to be copied
In One Touch Transfer (Copying) from VHS to DVD, the title is
divided by index signal detected and then recorded. You can
search desired titles with Direct Navigator’s Title View (l 38) after
transfer (copy) to DVD.
≥Titles recorded within 15 minutes (25 minutes in VP mode) of
each other may not be divided properly.
≥The recording time may become longer than the original title
depending on the number of index signals.
If you want to transfer (copy) without dividing the contents
into titles, follow the methods below.
≥Set “Time Limit” to “On” on the GUI transfer (l 46).
VHS
≥Insert the video cassette containing the program to be copied (l 10,
22).
45
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 46 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Transferring (Copying)
[6] Make sure “Start
Copying” is selected
and press [ENTER].
∫ GUI (Graphical User Interface) Transfer
(Copying)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can transfer (copy) programs recorded on a tape onto a disc°°
from the location° of playback as of the transfer (copying) start of the
tape.
° When you set the recording mode to “FR” and “Time Limit” to
“Off”, you can transfer (copy) the whole tape from the beginning to
the end. (l below)
°° Available discs for transfer (copying) from tape are DVD-RAM,
non-finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL, and +RW.
Preparation
≥Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.
DVD
≥Release protection (disc l 53, cartridge l 53). [RAM]
≥Insert a disc and confirm there is sufficient empty space for
recording on it (l 22, 37).
≥When SAP broadcast program is played back on VHS, select the
audio to be recorded on discs in “Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)”
in the “Setup” menu. (l 57) [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
VHS
≥Insert the video cassette containing the program to be copied (l 10,
22).
[1]
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Copy” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
Copy
[3] Set the transfer
Cancel All
(copying) direction.
Source
Copying Direction
SP
VHS-Video
∫ To change the setting
(1)Make sure “Copying Direction” is selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Source” is selected and press [ENTER].
(3)Press [3, 4] to select “VHS” and press [ENTER].
≥When you set “Source” to “VHS”, “DVD” is automatically
selected on “Destination”.
(4)Press [2].
(5)Press [4].
[4] Set the recording mode.
Copy
≥If you are not going to change
the recording mode, press [4],
then skip to step 5.
Copying Direction
∫ To change the setting
Time Limit
Cancel All
VHS
Content Type VHS-Video
DVD
Recording Mode
Mode
SP
SP
VHS-Video
Off
(1)Make sure “Mode” is selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Recording Mode” is selected and press [ENTER].
(3)Select recording mode (XP, SP, LP, EP or FR) with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
≥“About FR mode” (l right)
(4)Press [2].
(5)Press [4].
[5] Set the time limit.
≥If you are not going to change
the recording time, press [4],
then skip to step 6.
∫ To change the setting
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction
VHS
Time Limit
Off
DVD
Mode
VHS-Video
Time Limit
SP
Destination Capacity:
2:00
Off
(1)Make sure “Time Limit” is
selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Time Limit” is selected and press [ENTER].
(3)Select time limit (“On” or “Off”) with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
≥“When you select “Off”, proceed to Step (6) below.
(4)Press [3, 4] to select “Set time” and press [ENTER].
(5)Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [3, 4] to
set the recording time, and then press [ENTER].
≥You can also set the set time with the numeric buttons.
≥Maximum recording time is 8 hours.
(6)Press [2].
(7)Press [4].
46
RQTV0134
VHS
DVD
Mode
VHS-Video
Time Limit
SP
Press ENTER to start copying.
1:15
Start Copying
ENTER
and press [ENTER].
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
And then press [2, 1] to
select “Copy and
finalize” or “Copy only”
and press [ENTER].
Copying starts.
Note: After copying, the disc should be finalized
for playback on compatible DVD players.
Copy and finalize
Copy only
"Finalize" the disc to enable it for playback on
compatible DVD players.
Note: titles cannot be added to finalized disc.
≥Transfer (copying) is started.
≥Transfer (copying) is
automatically stopped when the tape reaches the end or the
remaining capacity of the disc is filled. (A message appears on
the TV screen and then disappears a few seconds later.)
≥If “Copy and finalize” is selected;
After finalizing, the discs become play-only and you can
also play them on other DVD equipment.
However, you can no longer record or edit.
≥In case the copying doesn’t complete due to shortage of
remaining time of disc or etc., the finalizing doesn’t start.
∫ To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
∫ About FR Mode
Destination
Mode
Cancel All
Copying Direction
Press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.
≥However, you cannot stop finalizing after it has started.
While both DVD and VHS are stopped
≥Set “Source” to “VHS”.
≥If you are not going to change
the copy direction, press [4],
then skip to step 4.
[7]
≥The confirmation screen
appears.
Select “Yes” with [2]
Copy
When “Time Limit” is set to “Off” in Step 5 above:
≥The recording mode is automatically selected by estimating the
remaining capacity of the disc for transfer (copying) of only the
recorded parts in the video cassette (unrecorded parts will not
be recorded).
≥When you press [ENTER] to start transfer (copy), the tape is
automatically fast-forwarded to the end and then fast-rewound
to the beginning before the transfer (copying) is actually started.
It may take time to start transfer (copy). If the remaining
capacity of the disc is insufficient, the transfer (copying) will be
stopped in the middle.
≥The recording is divided into titles every time the tape index
signals are detected.
When “Time Limit” is set to “On” in Step 5 above:
≥The recording mode is automatically determined by estimating
the remaining capacity of the disc for transfer (copying) of the
contents equivalent to the recording time set from the start point
of the transfer (copying) on the video cassette (unrecorded
parts will also be recorded).
≥The recording is not divided into titles.
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Transfer (Copying) from DVD
∫ One Touch Transfer (Copying) (DVD l VHS)
You can transfer (copy) titles recorded on a disc° onto a tape with
one touch of the button.
In One Touch Transfer (copying), all contents on the disc are
automatically copied onto the tape.
° Available discs for transfer (copying) onto tape are
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›].
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
Numeric
buttons
RESET
:, 9
REW
SKIP/INDEX
∫
Preparation
≥Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.
CH
ADD/DLT
CH
DVD
≥Insert the disc containing the program to be copied (l 22).
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
STOP
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
FF
PLAY
CM SKIP
Transferring (Copying)
M6VP&PC.book 47 ページ
1
;
VHS
≥ Insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.
(l 10, 22)
≥Confirm that the remaining tape time is sufficient for recording.
(l 37)
≥Select the recording mode. (l 24)
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
∫ When you transfer (copy) a whole disc
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
REC
T
COPYING
DV IN
COPYING indicator
Make sure that the DVD is stopped.
≥When resume function is activated, press [∫, STOP] to deactivate it. (l 30)
∫ When you transfer (copy) a title from the beginning
of the selected title to the end of the disc
∫ When you transfer (copy) a playlist from the
beginning of the selected playlist to the last playlist
Press [1, PLAY] to play back the desired title or playlist
(l 41).
≥You can transfer (copy) (a title or playlist) while playback is
paused by pressing [;, PAUSE].
≥You cannot transfer (copy) a playlist which is longer than
8 hours. (When you transfer (copy) multiple playlists, the playlist
which is longer than 8 hours is omitted.)
[1] Press and hold [VHS —] on the main unit for
about 3 seconds or more (until “START” on the
unit’s display terminates flashing).
≥Check if transfer (copying) starts properly.
≥Copying is automatically completed
e.g.; [RAM]
when playback of the disc is finished
or the tape reaches its end.
(Remaining time)
∫ To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
Press [∫, STOP] or press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds
or more.
Notes
≥While One Touch Transfer (Copying) is activated, a scheduled
recording cannot be started.
≥When the transfer (copying) is not started or not executed, the
“COPYING” indicator blinks for about 7 seconds. Check to make
sure the unit is properly prepared.
≥If you start transfer (copying) when resume function is activated,
the DVD is copied from the beginning of the title which you
stopped.
∫ About Recording VISS (l 35)
In One Touch Copying from DVD to VHS, the index signal is
automatically recorded for each title. You can search desired
titles with [: ] or [ 9].
47
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 48 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Transferring (Copying)
(4)Press [2].
(5)Press [4].
DVD/VHS
[5] Register titles and playlists for transfer
(copying).
POWER
POWER
DRIVE
SELECT TV/VIDEO
CH
≥If you are going to transfer a registered list without making any
changes to it, press [4], then skip to step 6.
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
RESET
:, 9
∫ To set for the
registration
CH
STOP
REW
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
DVD
ADD/DLT
CH
FF
PLAY
1
;
CM SKIP
DIRECT NAVIGATO
AUDIO
A
REC
SP
DVD-RAM
R
A
VHS
Video
08
07
SUB MENU
10 10/25 Mon
123
FUNCTIONS
CREATE
---
8 10/25 Mon
ABC
08
07
RETURN
B
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
2:00 (SP)
DVD-RAM
RETURN
SUB MENU
SP
0
TIONS
FU N C
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
VHS
Video
DELETE
SCHEDULE
ENTER
6:00
0:00 ( 0%)
No.
Size
Title Name
(1)Make sure “Create List” is
New Entry (Total = 0)
Mode
selected and press [1].
Create List
(2)Make sure “New Entry (Total
= 0)” is selected and press
Copy
[ENTER].
Current Remaining:
6:00
Cancel All
Total list size:
0:00 ( 0%)
(3)Press [AUDIO/A] to select
Copying Direction
No.
Size
Title Name
New Entry (Total = 0)
“Video” or press [DISPLAY/B]
Mode
to select “Playlists”.
Create List
≥You can also select the view
Video
Playlists
by selecting “Other View”
from the SUB MENU.
1Press [SUB MENU].
Create List
2Make sure “Other View” is
Video
Playlists
selected and press
[ENTER] twice.
(4)Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select
the title or playlist and press
[ENTER].
Previous
Page 02/02
Next
≥You can register multiple
SUB MENU
Select Previous
Next
titles or playlists to the
copying list by repeating the Copy
Current Remaining:
6:00
above steps 2 to 4.
Cancel All
Total list size:
2:30 (42%)
Copying Direction
No.
Title Name
Size
(“To edit the transfer
01 2:00 SP (33%) ABC
Mode
(copying) list” l 49)
02 0:30 SP ( 7%) 123
New Entry (Total = 2)
≥“To show other pages”( l
Create List
below)
Page 01/01
Start Copying
Create a Copying list.
≥“Multiple editing” (l below)
SUB MENU
(5)Press [2].
Registered titles
≥Before pressing [2], make
sure that the value on
“Copying list” is smaller than the value on “Current
Remaining”.
(6)Press [4].
When you finish creating the
Copy
Cancel All
copying list,
DVD
∫
Current Remaining:
Total list size:
Cancel All
Copying Direction
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
Copy
10 10/25 Mon
123
2:00 (SP)
---
8 10/25 Mon
ABC
--
--
--
ENTER
∫ GUI (Graphical User Interface) Transfer
(Copying)
DVD
[RAM] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
You can transfer (copy) multiple titles or playlists recorded on a disc
onto a tape in combination.
≥Available discs for transfer (copy) onto tape are [RAM] [-RW‹VR›].
≥Since you cannot create playlists on +RW, you cannot copy those.
[+RW]
DVD
≥Insert the disc containing the program to be copied (l 22).
[6]
VHS
≥ Insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.
(l 10, 22)
≥Confirm that the remaining tape time is sufficient for recording.
(l 37)
While both DVD and VHS are stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Copy” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[3] Set “Copying Direction”.
≥Set “Source” to “DVD”.
≥If you are not going to change the copy direction, press [4],
then skip to step 4.
∫ To change the setting
(1)Make sure “Copying Direction” is selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Source” is selected and press [ENTER].
(3)Press [3, 4] to select “DVD” Copy
and press [ENTER].
Cancel All
Source
Copying Direction
≥When you set “Source” to
Destination
Mode
“DVD”, “VHS” is
automatically selected on
“Destination”.
(4)Press [2].
(5)Press [4].
SP
Video
[4] Set the recording mode.
48
RQTV0134
SP
ENTER
Preparation
≥Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.
[1]
VHS
Video
Copy
≥If you are not going to change
the recording mode, press [4],
then skip to step 5.
Copying Direction
Video
SP
∫ To Change the setting
Create List
0
Cancel All
DVD
Content Type
Video
Recording Mode
SP
VHS
Mode
(1)Make sure “Mode” is selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Recording Mode” is selected and press [ENTER].
(3)Select recording mode (SP, EP or VP) with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
Make sure to select
“Start Copying” and
press [ENTER].
[7]
≥The confirmation screen
appears.
Select “Yes” with [2] and
≥Transfer (copying) is started.
Copying Direction
DVD
VHS
Mode
Video
SP
Create List
2
Press ENTER to start copying.
Start Copying
ENTER
press [ENTER].
∫ To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
Press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.
Various operations
∫ To show other pages
Press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP].
≥Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER] to show other pages.
∫ Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;, PAUSE]. (Repeat)
Press [ENTER] to register to the list.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;, PAUSE] again to cancel.
≥When you switch between the “Video” and “Playlists” tab, the
check mark is canceled.
≥Titles or playlists are registered to the copying list in ascending
order of title number.
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
To edit the transfer (copying) list
Select the item in step 5 (4). (l 48)
[1] Select a desired item with [3, 4] and press
[SUB MENU].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[ENTER].
∫ Transfer (Copying) a DVD-Video, finalized
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, or +R DL
Clear All
Add
Remove
Move
Clear All:
Clear all items registered on the transfer (copying) list.
≥Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Add:
Add new items to the transfer (copying) list.
≥Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the titles and playlists to be added
and press [ENTER].
Remove:
Remove the selected item.
≥Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥Multiple editing is possible. (l 48)
You can transfer (copy) the contents of a disc being played onto a
tape for the set time while playing the disc.
≥Operations and on screen displays during transfer
(copying) are also recorded.
≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be transferred (copied).
≥The following cannot be transferred (copied): DVD-Audio, Video
CD, Audio CD and so on.
After performing steps 1 to 4 of “GUI (Graphical User Interface)
Transfer (Copying)” (l 48),
[5] Set “Time Limit”.
≥If you are not going to change
the setting, press [4], then
skip to step 6.
∫ Setting the unit to
transfer (copy)
according to the set time
Move:
Move selected items or change the order of items on the transfer
(copying) list.
≥Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [ENTER].
DVD
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction
DVD
Time Limit
On
Set time
2:00
VHS
Mode
SP
DVD-Video
Time Limit
Current Remaining:
2:00
2:00
Set the time limit.
Start Copying
(1)Make sure “Time Limit” is
selected and press [1].
(2)Make sure “Time Limit” is selected and press [ENTER].
To cancel all registered transfer (copying) settings and lists
After performing steps 1 to 4 (l 48)
[1] Press [3, 4] to select
Copy
“Cancel All” and press
Cancel All
Copying Direction
[ENTER].
[2] Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”
Press ENTER to cancel all settings.
Mode
and press [ENTER].
≥The settings and lists may be canceled in the following
situations.
- When a title or a playlist has been recorded or erased at the
transfer (copying) source.
- When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit
or open the tray.
Video
Transferring (Copying)
M6VP&PC.book 49 ページ
≥Setting the unit to transfer (copy) all the content on the disc
(3)Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [ENTER].
(4)Press [2].
VHS
≥Setting the transfer (copying) time
(3)Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [ENTER].
(4)Press [3, 4] to select “Set time” and press [ENTER].
(5)Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [3, 4] to
set the recording time, and then press [ENTER].
≥You can also set the set time with the numeric buttons.
≥Maximum recording time is 8 hours.
(6)Press [2].
(7)Press [4].
SP
[6] Make sure “Start
Copying” is selected
and press [ENTER].
Copy
Cancel All
Copying Direction
DVD
VHS
Mode
Press ENTER to start copying.
Press [2] to select “Yes” and
Time Limit
press [ENTER] to start transfer
(copy).
Start Copying
The disc top menu is displayed.
≥Disc play automatically begins
from title 1 when “First Title” is selected from the “Playback will
start with:” menu when finalizing the disc (l 54).
When the top menu is
My favorite
01/02
displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to
DVD-Video
SP
2:00
ENTER
[7]
select the title you want
to start transferring
(copying), and press
[ENTER].
01
Chapter 1
02
Chapter 2
03
Chapter 3
04
Chapter 4
05
Chapter 5
06
Chapter 6
07
Chapter 7
Previous
08
Chapter 8
Play
Next
≥While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time.
≥After the last title on the disc has finished playing, the top
menu is recorded until the set time is reached.
∫ To stop transfer (copying) in the middle
Press [∫, STOP] or press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds
or more.
Notes
≥The screen on the right (screen saver) is
recorded at the beginning.
≥It is recorded as 1 title from the start of transfer
(copying) to the end (even if there are multiple
programs).
≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top menu does not
display automatically, press [1, PLAY] to start.
≥REC only appears on the unit’s display when transferring from
DVD-Video.
49
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 50 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Transferring (Copying)
≥Start playing the video cassette and find the recording start
point.
[4] Press [;, PAUSE], then press [¥, REC].
≥Put the unit in recording standby mode.
IN 2
S VIDEO
VIDEO
[5] Start play on the external device.
[6] Press [;, PAUSE] at the point where you want
to start recording.
L /MONO AUDIO R
∫ To skip unwanted parts
(1)
(2)
(3)
Press [;, PAUSE] to pause recording. (Press again to restart
recording.)
∫ To stop recording
Press [∫, STOP].
(4)
(1) S-Video cable (not supplied)
(2) Audio/Video cable (not supplied)
A Yellow (VIDEO)
B White (L)
C Red (R)
(3) DV cable (IEEE 1394 4-pin, not supplied)
(4) External device (Playback equipment)
Before connecting any cables, first make sure that the power
for the unit and the external device are off. Then, after
connecting cables, turn on both.
Recording from an external device
When connecting the IN2 input terminals on the front of the unit
≥You can also connect to the IN1 input terminals on the rear of the
unit.
Notes
≥When recording using the unit’s input terminals, only the sound
received at the time of recording will be recorded. As long as
secondary audio that is recorded on the media in the external
device is not output to the unit in play, it is not recorded.
≥If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural, connect to
L/MONO. (Both left and right channels are recorded when
connected through L/MONO.)
≥The S-VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO terminal.
Preparation
DVD [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Release protection (disc l 53, cartridge l 53). [RAM]
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
VHS
≥Insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.
(l 22)
≥Select VHS side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1] Press [REC MODE] to select the recording
mode. (DVD l 24, VHS l 24)
≥DVD [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
- It is also possible to perform Flexible Recording (FR). (l 27)
[2]
While stopped
Press [CH, W, X] or [INPUT SELECT] to select
the input channel for the equipment you have
connected.
≥Select IN1 or IN2.
DVD
Follow the above steps 1 to 2.
[3] Start play on the external device.
[4] Press [¥, REC] at the point where you want to
start recording.
VHS
Follow the above steps 1 to 2.
50
[3] Press [1, PLAY].
RQTV0134
For your reference
≥Almost all videos and DVD software on sale have been treated to
prevent illegal copying. Such software cannot be recorded.
DV camcorder recording
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Programs are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are
created at each break in the images and the playlist is created
automatically. [RAM]
Preparation
≥Turn on the main unit and DV equipment.
≥Select the type of audio recording from “Select Audio Channel for
DV Input” in the Audio menu. (l 57)
When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video
camcorder), you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape
only.
≥Pause play on the DV equipment at the point you want recording to
start.
≥Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
[1]
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select “Other Functions” and
press [ENTER].
[3] Press [3, 4] to select “DV Camcorder Rec.”
and press [ENTER].
[4] Press [2, 1] to select “Rec.” and press
[ENTER].
When recording finishes
The confirmation screen appears. Press [ENTER] to finish DV
automatic recording.
To stop recording
Press [∫, STOP]. The confirmation screen appears. Press [ENTER].
Notes
≥Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder)
can be connected to the unit via the DV IN terminal.
≥If you use video camcorders from other manufacturer’s these are
not guaranteed to work.
≥If the DV equipment is in a mode for operating the SD card, it is not
possible to record with “DV Camcorder Rec.”.
≥It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV
equipment.
≥The DV IN terminal on this unit is for use with DV equipment only.
(It cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
≥The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
≥Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
≥The date and time information on the tape in the DV equipment will
not be recorded.
≥You cannot record and play simultaneously.
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the
unit off and back on.
If that does not work, follow the instructions for Recording
from an external device (lleft).
M6VP&PC.book 51 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
[2] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character you
want to enter and press [ENTER].
DVD/VHS
POWER
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
≥To erase a character
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field
and press [;, PAUSE].
POWER
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
DRIVE
SELECT
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
Numeric
buttons
RESET
:, 9
STOP
DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
1
PLAY
;
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
ENTER
SUB MENU
¥
AUDIO
A
REC
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
Press [RETURN].
≥Characters will not be saved.
Note
≥If a name is long, only part of it is displayed on the title list (l 38)
and the playlist screen (l 42).
Preparation
≥Insert a recorded disc.
≥Release protection (Disc l 53, title l 39, cartridge l 53). [RAM]
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1] Show Enter Name screen.
Refer to the following pages regarding display of the Enter Name
Screen.
≥Title
(l 39)
≥Title (scheduled recording)
(l 28)
≥Disc
(l 53)
≥Playlist
(l 42)
Name field: shows the text you have entered
Title Name
_
Set
V
S
∫ To save phrases
REC MODE
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Characters
≥Title
44
≥Disc
40
π
R
U
After you have finished naming
RETURN
The maximum number of characters:
[RAM]
Characters
≥Title
64
≥Title (scheduled recording)
44
≥Playlist
64
≥Disc
64
1 1
2
3
2 A
B
C
3 D
E
F
4 G
H
I
5 J
K
L
j
6 M N
O
7 P
8 T
Q
R
U
V
9 W X
0 . ,
Y
?
5
6
7
8
a
b
c
i j
d
e
f
/
l %
g
h
i
fl
$
k
n
l
O N @
m
o
[
p
q
r
t
u
v
Z
w
x
!
"
'
y
:
S
[3]
∫ To cancel in the middle
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
Erase
Phrase Save
Phrase List
O
Q
≥Save/recall phrased (l below)
FUNCTIONS
Entering text
;
7 P
8 T
The title is entered and the screen disappears.
RETURN
4
6 M N
7
L
7
Press [∫, STOP].
TIONS
FU N C
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
SUB MENU
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
K
7
≥To enter space
Press [¢, CANCEL] and press
[ENTER].
FF
REW
PAUSE
(1)Press 7 to move to the 7th row.
(2)Press 7 twice to highlight “R”.
(3)Press [ENTER].
ADD/DLT
CH
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
∫
≥Using the numeric buttons to enter characters
e.g., entering the letter “R”.
5 J
CH, W, X
CH
Transferring (Copying)/Entering text
Entering text
9
You can save frequently used phrases and recall them later.
Maximum number of saved phrases: 20
Maximum number of characters per phrase: 20
≥After entering the phrase (step 1 to 2, “Entering text”)
[1] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Phrase Save” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [9, SKIP] to select “Phrase Save”.
[2] Press [2, 1] to select “Save” and press [ENTER].
≥Press [RETURN] to cancel.
∫ To recall a saved phrases
[1] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Phrase List” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, SKIP] to select “Phrase List”.
[2] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the phrase to be recalled and
press [ENTER].
∫ To erase saved phrases
[1] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Phrase List” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, SKIP] to select “Phrase List”.
[2] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the phrase to be erased.
[3] Press [SUB MENU] to show “Erase Phrase” and press
[ENTER].
[4] Press [2, 1] to select “Erase” and press [ENTER].
[5] Press [RETURN].
For your reference
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the TOP MENU
after finalization (l 55). When entering a title name, the name that
will appear in the TOP MENU can be previewed in “Top Menu
Preview (Finalized Disc)” window.
Title Name
_
Top Menu Preview
(Finalized Disc)
1 1
2
3
5
6
7
8
2 A
B
C
a
b
c
i j
3 D
E
F
d
e
f
/
l %
4 G
H
I
g
h
i
fl
$
4
9
0
&
0
&
]
_
s
(
{
}
)
-
z
;
\
`
|
^
Space
ENTER
51
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 52 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Deleting title
Selecting recorded titles to delete
–Delete Navigator
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
DRIVE
SELECT
DRIVE
SELECT TV/VIDEO
CH
TRACKING/V-LOCK
3
6
9
1 2
4 5
7 8
CANCEL
0
INPUT
SELECT
RESET
:, 9
;
VOLUME
TIME SLIP/
ADD/DLT
CH
DELETE
REW
PAUSE
JET REW
PLAY
CM SKIP
R
DIRECT NAVIGATO
SUB MENU
TIONS
FU N C
ENTER
[1]
FF
SCHEDULE
AUDIO
A
REC
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
STOP
CH
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥A title cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make certain
before proceeding.
≥You cannot delete while recording.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase after
deletion.
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases when the last
recorded title is deleted. (The recording space may increase
slightly when other titles are deleted.)
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press
[ENTER].
DELETE Navigator
Title View
DVD-RAM
10 10/23 Mon
FUNCTIONS
---
08
07
8 10/23 Mon
--
--
--
RETURN
CREATE
RETURN
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
Preparation
≥Release protection (disc l 53, cartridge l 53). [RAM]
≥Insert a disc (l 22).
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
Previous
Delete
Page 02/02
SUB MENU
Select
Next
Previous
Next
[3] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press
[ENTER].
∫ To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP] to show other
pages.
∫ Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;, PAUSE]. (Repeat)
A check mark appears. Press [;, PAUSE] again to cancel.
[4] Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press
[ENTER].
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
Deleting title during play
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Once title is deleted, it cannot be restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
[1]
Delete Title
During Play
Press [DELETE].
[2] Press [2] to select
“Delete” and press
[ENTER].
Date
Channel
10/ 23/2007 Mon
12
Time remaining
after deletion
Start
12:00 AM
0 : 58(SP)
Corresponding playlist's chapters will be deleted.
Delete
Cancel
ENTER
For your reference
≥You cannot delete while recording or transferring (copying).
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase after
erasing.
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases when the last
recorded title is deleted. (The recording space may increase
slightly when other titles are deleted.)
52
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 53 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Setting the protection
Preparation
≥Release protection (disc l right, cartridge l right). [RAM]
≥Insert a disc (l 22).
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
[1]
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Select “Other
Functions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[3] Select “DVD
Management” with [3,
4] and press [ENTER].
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD Management”.
This allows you to protect the whole disc from accidental erasure
and release disc protection.
e.g., [RAM]
FUNCTIONS
DVD-RAM
[4] Select “Disc Protection” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].
Cartridge Protection Off
Disc Protection Off
Playback
Playlist
Program
Flexible Recording
delete
DV Camcorder Rec.
Copy
Setup
Other Functions
≥To protect
Disc Protection
DVD Management
Set disc protection.
Note: Protected discs cannot be renamed
or have their content changed,
but can still be re-formatted.
ENTER
RETURN
DVD
MANAGEMENT Titles
7
Free Time 0 : 42 (SP)
DVD-RAM Used Time 0 : 58
Disc Name
Disc Protection
e.g., [RAM]
DVD
MANAGEMENT
DVD-RAM
Titles
7
Used Time 0 : 58
e.g., [-R]
Free Time 0 : 42 (SP)
DVD
MANAGEMENT
DVD-R
Disc Name
Disc Protection
Yes
ENTER
≥To release protection
Finalize
Disc Protection
Cancel disc protection.
All write restrictions will
be removed.
Format Disc (DVD)
ENTER
On
Delete All Titles
Free Time 0 : 42 (SP)
Playback will start with: Top Menu
Delete All Titles
No
Format Disc (DVD)
Titles
7
Used Time 0 : 58
Disc Name
Off
Deleting title/DVD Management
DVD Management
DVD
MANAGEMENT Titles
7
Free Time 0 : 42 (SP)
DVD-RAM Used Time 0 : 58
Disc Name
ENTER
[4] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item and press
[ENTER].
Disc Protection
Yes
No
Off
Delete All Titles
Format Disc (DVD)
You can change various settings.
≥After this operation, follow the desired operation.
ENTER
∫ Protection of cartridge disc
∫ To stop to the previous screen
You can protect the contents of your discs.
≥With the write-protect tab in the protect
position, you cannot record to, edit, or erase
from the disc.
Press [RETURN].
Providing a disc with a name
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD Management”.
Deleting all titles and playlists
–Delete All Titles
[4] Select “Disc Name” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
Refer to “Entering text” (l 51).
≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.
≥With a finalized discs and +RW, the name is displayed on the Top
Menu.
Movie
DVD
MANAGEMENT Titles
7
Free Time 0 : 42 (SP)
DVD-RAM Used Time 0 : 58
Disc Name
Disc Protection
PROTECT
On
[RAM]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD Management”.
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
[4] Select “Delete All Titles” with [3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].
[6] Select “Start” with [2] and press [ENTER].
≥A message appears when finished.
[7] Press [ENTER].
Notes
≥Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
53
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 54 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
DVD Management
Deleting all contents of a disc
–Format Disc ( DVD )
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
DRIVE
SELECT
TV/VIDEO CH
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD Management”.
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
RESET
ADD/DLT
CH
DELETE
REW
SKIP/INDEX
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
FF
PLAY
CM SKIP
SCHEDULE
R
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
e.g.; [RAM]
Format Disc (DVD)
Formatting the disc will erase all contents.
This will take approximately 1 minute.
Do you want to continue?
FU N
ENTER
SUB MENU
Yes
CTIONS
DIRECT NAVIG
ATO
[4] Select “Format Disc ( DVD )” with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].
SLOW/SEARCH
STOP
AUDIO
A
REC
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before
proceeding.
The contents are deleted when you format a disc even if you have
set protection.
CH
[6] Select “Start” with [2] and press [ENTER].
RETURN
CREATE
No
Format Disc (DVD)
RETURN
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
Protected contents will be erased too.
Are you sure you want to continue?
Start
Cancel
≥Formatting starts.
≥A message appears when formatting is finished.
Notes
≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however it may take
up to a maximum of 70 minutes [RAM].
≥Do not disconnect the AC power supply cord while
formatting. This can render the disc unusable.
[7] Press [ENTER].
To stop formatting [RAM]
Press [RETURN].
≥You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc
must be reformatted if you do this.
Notes
≥When a disc has been formatted using this unit, it may not be
possible to use it on any other equipment.
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL and CD-R/RW cannot be formatted.
≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.
≥The disc cannot be formatted if the write protect tab (l 53) is
switched to “PROTECT”. Release the protection to continue.
≥The message “Unable to format” appears when trying to format
discs the unit cannot use.
Selecting whether to show the Top
Menu first
–Playback will start with:
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD Management”.
Select whether to show the top menu after finalizing the disc. Do this
before finalizing the disc.
[4] Select “Playback will start with:” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[5] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item and press
[ENTER].
Playback will start with:
DVD's Top Menu
First Title on DVD
≥DVD’s Top Menu: The top menu appears first.
≥First Title on DVD:The disc content is played without
displaying the top menu.
54
RQTV0134
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment
–Finalize
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD Management”.
≥Make selection from “Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
–Playback will start with:” before finalizing the disc. (l 54)
You can play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R
or +R DL on compatible DVD players by finalizing it on the unit,
effectively making it into DVD-Video that complies with DVD-Video
standards.
The menu you create with the unit can also be used on DVD players.
[4] Select “Finalize” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].
Finalize
Finalizing will take approximately ≤ minutes.
Do you want to continue? (Required for
playback on compatible DVD players.)
Yes
No
[6] Select “Start” with [2] and press [ENTER].
Finalize
Finalizing is necessary to enable playback
of the disc on compatible DVD players.
Once finalized, titles cannot be added
to the disc.
Continue finalizing the disc?
Start
Cancel
≥Finalizing starts.
≥You cannot cancel finalizing.
≥A message appears when finalizing is finished.
Notes
≥Finalizing can take a few minutes, up to a maximum of
15 minutes, depending on the remaining space on the disc.
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] up to 60 minutes)
≥Do not disconnect the AC power supply cord while
finalizing. This can render the disc unusable.
Enabling the second layer on DL (dualor double-layer on single side) discs to
be recordable
–Close First Layer
[-R]DL] [+R]DL]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD Management”.
DVD-R DL and +R DL discs have two layer of recording surface on
one side. this unit does not offer seamless recording on two layers.
Recording stops when space on the first layer becomes full. You
must close the first layer to start recording on the second layer.
Closing makes the first layer unavailable for recording (edition is still
available. You cannot cancel closing. Make certain before
proceeding.
[4] Press [3, 4] to select “Close First Layer” and
press [ENTER].
[5] Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
[6] Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press
[ENTER].
Closing the layer starts. You cannot cancel closing.
Closing the layer can take several minutes, up to a maximum of
30 minutes, depending on the remaining space on the first layer.
Note
≥Do not disconnect the AC power supply cord while closing the
layer. This will render the disc unusable.
[7] Press [ENTER].
∫ To confirm the layer you can record
You can confirm the remaining recording time on the layer you can
record.
DVD
MANAGEMENT
DVD-R DL
≥Visit Panasonic’s homepage for more information about DVDs.
For U.S.A.:http://www.panasonic.com/playDVD-R
For Canada:http://www.panasonic.ca
Titles
7
Used Time 0 : 58
Free Time 0 : 42 (SP)
Of the first layer
Disc Name
Playback will start with: Top Menu
Finalize
[7] Press [ENTER].
Notes
≥When finalizing a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may
take longer than displayed on the confirmation screen
(approximately 4 times).
≥After finalizing
- The disc becomes play-only and you can no longer record or edit
it. [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL]
- You can record and edit the disc after formatting (l 54) although
it becomes play-only after finalizing. [-RW‹V›]
- DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +R DL
finalized on the unit may not be playable on other players
depending on the condition of the recording.
- There is a pause of several seconds between titles and chapters
during play.
- Titles are divided into about 5-minute chapters° ([-R]DL] [+R]DL] 8
minutes).
° This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode
of recording.
DVD Management
M6VP&PC.book 55 ページ
Close First Layer
ENTER
Notes
≥You cannot close the first layer when it has no recording.
≥By closing the layer, you can record or edit discs that have been
recorded on the second layer by other equipment.
Creating Top Menu
–Create DVD Top Menu
[+RW]
≥Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DVD Management”.
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you to create the menu before playing a
+RW disc on other equipment.
[4] Press [3, 4] to select “Create DVD Top Menu”
and press [ENTER].
[5] Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
[6] Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press
[ENTER].
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.
[7] Press [ENTER].
≥Recording or editing on the disc may delete the menu. In that case,
create the menu again.
≥You cannot use the title menu for playing on this unit.
55
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 56 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Changing the unit’s settings
Common procedures
Summary of settings
Use the following procedure to change the settings if necessary.
[1]
While stopped
FUNCTIONS
No Disc
No Disc
Press [FUNCTIONS].
≥
Program
[2] Select “Other
Functions” with [3, 4]
and press [ENTER].
[3] Select “Setup” with
[3, 4] and press
[ENTER].
This description shows the initial settings for the unit. For
details on menu operation. (l left)
≥Underlined items are the factory default settings.
indicates settings effective for both DVD and
/
VHS.
Copy
Other Functions
ENTER
RETURN
(1)
(2)
≥
indicates settings effective for DVD only.
≥
indicates settings effective for VHS only.
∫ Channel
/
Signal Source (RF IN) (l 17)
(3)
Select to suit the type of antenna you are using.
[Antenna] [CableTV]
Set Channels Automatically (l 17)
Setup
Off Timer
Remote Control Code
Clock Settings
6 Hours
Set Code 1
Setup
Quick Start
On
Disc
Restore Default Settings
Channel
(1) Menus
(2) Items
(3) Options
Video
Audio
Manual Channel Captions (l 18)
∫ Setup
Off Timer
/
Select how long the unit remains on when it is not being used.
[2 Hours] [6 Hours] [Off]
Display
TV Screen
VHS
Preset Channel Captions (l 18)
ENTER
[4] Select a menu with [3, 4] and press [2, 1].
[5] Select an item to be changed with [3, 4] and
press [ENTER].
[6] Select an option with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
≥Some options require different operations. Follow the
displayed instructions.
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN]. Even if you have changed an option, the change
is not activated until you press [ENTER].
∫ To exit the screen
Remote Control Code (l 19)
[Set Code 1]
[Set Code 2]
[Set Code 3]
Clock Settings
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Set Clock Automatically (l 20)
Set Clock Manually (l 17)
Adjust Time Zone (l 20)
This corrects the time set in Auto Clock Setting.
The status is not displayed on the Setup menu when the Auto
Clock Setting is not set.
[j1] [0] [i1]
Press [RETURN] several times.
Quick Start
For your reference
≥The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording on DVD-RAM°
° From the power off state, recording on DVD-RAM starts about 1
second after first pressing the [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] and then
sequentially pressing the [¥, REC] (Quick Start Mode).
Entering a password (Ratings)
You can limit play of DVDs unsuitable for some audiences (children,
for example). Play and changes to the settings are not possible
unless you enter a password.
Power consumption is also higher when the unit is turned off if this is
set to “On”.
[On] [Off]
Preparation
≥Select DVD side with pressing [DRIVE SELECT].
Restore Default Settings
When setting ratings
The password screen is shown when you select levels 0 to 7.
[1] Input a 4-digit password with the numeric buttons.
≥If you enter a wrong number, press [2] to erase it before you
press [ENTER].
≥Do not forget your password.
[2] Press [ENTER].
[3] Press [ENTER].
The password is entered and the unit is locked.
Now, when you insert a DVD-Video that exceeds the ratings limit
you set, a message appears on the TV.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
When changing ratings
The password screen is shown when you select “Ratings” (l right)
[1] Input a 4-digit password with the numeric buttons and press
[ENTER].
Unlock Recorder:
Change Password:
Change Level:
Temporary Unlock:
To unlock the unit and return the rating to 8
To change your password
To change the rating level
To temporarily unlock the unit (the unit locks
again if you switch it to standby or open the
disc tray)
[2] Select a desired item with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].
Actual screens depend on the operation. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
56
RQTV0134
This returns Setup menus to default settings, except for the clock,
channel settings, ratings level, and on-screen language.
[Yes] [No]
∫ Disc
Settings for Playback
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Ratings (“Entering a password (Ratings)” l left)
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)
[8 No Limit]: All DVD-Video can be played.
[1] to [7]:
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
[0 Lock All]: Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
Changing ratings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)
[Unlock Recorder] [Change Password]
[Change Level] [Temporary Unlock]
Play DVD-Audio in Video Mode
Select “Video Mode (Video On)” to play DVD-Video content on
some DVD-Audio.
[Video Mode (Video On)] [Audio Mode (Video Off)]
Video Mode
(Video ON)
The setting returns to “Audio Mode (Video Off)”
when you change the disc or turn the unit off.
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Audio Language
[English]
[French]
[Spanish]
[Original]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]
Subtitle Language
[Automatic]
[English]
[French]
[Spanish]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]
Menu Language
[English]
[French]
[Spanish]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]
Choose the language for audio, subtitles and disc menus. [DVD-V]
≥If a language which is not recorded is selected, or if languages
are already fixed on the disc, the language set as the default on
the disc will be played instead.
Original
The original language of each disc will be selected.
Other ¢¢¢¢
This is the language code setting.
Input a code number with the numeric buttons.
(l 58, “Language code list”)
Automatic
If the language selected for “Audio Language” is not available,
subtitles of that language will automatically appear if available
on the disc.
Settings for Recording
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Recording Time in EP Mode
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode
(l 24, “Recording modes and approximate recording times (DVD)”).
[EP-Extended Play (6H)] [EP-Extended Play (8H)]
EP-Extended You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
Play (6H)
disc.
∫ Audio
Dynamic Range Compression
[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)
Change the dynamic range (l 68) for easier listening in low volume.
[On] [Off]
Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type (SAP)
when recording or transferring (copying) to DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVDVideo format) or +R. (You cannot select the audio type on the unit
when recording audio to DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or
+R from an external device. Select it on the external device.)
[Main] [Secondary Audio Program (SAP)]
Changing the unit’s settings
M6VP&PC.book 57 ページ
Digital Audio Output
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through
the unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (l 15).
Press [ENTER] to display the menu.
PCM Down Conversion
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz or
88.2 kHz.
≥Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz despite the above
settings if the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz
or 88.2 kHz, or the disc has copy protection.
[On]
[Off]
On
Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz. (Choose
when the connected equipment cannot process
signals with sampling frequency of 96 kHz or
88.2 kHz.)
Off
Signals are output as 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz. (Choose
when the connected equipment can process signals
with sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)
EP-Extended You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
Play (8H)
disc.
Dolby Digital
∫ Video
Still Mode (paused video)
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play.
(l 68, “Frame and field”)
[Automatic] [Field] [Frame]
Field
Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is selected.
Frame
Select if you cannot see small text or fine patterns
clearly when “Automatic” is selected.
Black Level Control
Select “Normal”, “Lighter” or “Darker” to adjust the black level control
to the desired setting for picture enhancement.
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Input Level
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream” which
processes Dolby Digital signals on other connected
equipment or to convert the signals to “PCM (2ch)” on the unit
before output.
[Bitstream] [PCM]
Bitstream
When you have connected the unit to a piece of
equipment having Dolby Digital logo.
PCM
When you have connected the unit to a piece of
equipment that doesn’t have Dolby Digital logo°.
DTS
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream” which
processes DTS signals on other connected equipment
or to convert the signals to “PCM (2ch)” on the unit
before output.
[Bitstream] [PCM]
Adjusts the black level of the input signal.
[Lighter] [Darker]
Bitstream
When you have connected the unit to a piece of
equipment having DTS logo.
Output Level (Composite/SVideo)
PCM
When you have connected the unit to a piece of
equipment that doesn’t have DTS logo°.
Adjusts the black level of the output signal from the VIDEO OUT
and S VIDEO OUT terminal.
[Lighter] [Darker]
Output Level (Component)
Adjusts the black level of the output signal from the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT (Y/PB/PR) terminals.
[Lighter] [Normal] [Darker]
° Incorrect settings can cause noise to be output which can be
harmful to your ears and speakers, and audio will not be recorded
properly on media such as mini discs.
Select Audio Channel for DV Input
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV
in terminal. (l 50)
[Stereo 1] [Stereo 2] [Mix]
Stereo 1
Records audio (L1, R1)
Stereo 2
Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
subsequent to original recording.
Mix
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
57
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 58 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Changing the unit’s settings
≥ Underlined items are the factory default settings.
∫ TV Screen
∫ Display
/
Status Messages
TV Type (l 18)
/
Choose the setting to suit your TV and preference.
[Aspect 4:3 & 480i] [Aspect 4:3 & 480p]
[Aspect 16:9 & 480i] [Aspect 16:9 & 480p]
Choose whether to show status messages automatically or not.
[Automatic] [Off]
4:3 TV Settings for DVD-Video
On-screen Language
You can select how to display the image on the TV when you watch
16:9 images (DVD-Video) on a 4:3 standard aspect TV. (l 68)
[Pan and Scan (Stretch to fit)] [Letterbox (Shrink to fit)]
Choose the language for these menus and the on-screen
messages.
[English] [Español] [Français]
Blue Background
Select whether to show the blue background, normally shown when
TV reception is poor.
[On] [Off]
Pan and Scan
(Stretch to fit)
Video recorded for a widescreen is played with
the sides cut off if Pan & Scan was specified.
If 16:9 software prohibits Pan & Scan, the
image will appear in the letterbox style (with
black bands above and below the picture)
despite the setting here.
Letterbox
(Shrink to fit)
Video recorded for a widescreen is played in
the letterbox style.
FL Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
[Bright] [Dim] [Automatic]
Automatic The display turns dark during play, and reappears
momentarily if a button is pressed. When the unit is
turned off, the unit’s display disappears. While using
this mode the standby power consumption can be
reduced.
4:3 TV Settings for DVD-RAM
You can select how to display the image on the TV when you watch
16:9 images (DVD-RAM) on a 4:3 standard aspect TV. (l 68)
[4:3 Aspect] [Pan and Scan (Stretch to fit)]
[Letterbox (Shrink to fit)]
4:3 Aspect
Titles are played as recorded.
Pan and Scan
(Stretch to fit)
Video recorded for a widescreen is played with
the sides cut off.
Letterbox
(Shrink to fit)
Video recorded for a widescreen is played in
the letterbox style.
∫ VHS
Select Tape Length
Set the length of tape you are using so the unit can show the correct
remaining time.
[T120] [T160] [T180]
T120
T30, T60, T90 and T120 tapes
T160
T140 and T160 tapes
T180
T180 tapes
Jet Search (l 34)
Set the speed for Jet Search when playing EP and VP tapes.
≥It is possible to view the picture recorded in EP or VP mode at
approx. 27 or 35 times speed.
[k27] [k35]
≥Select [k27] if the picture is poor at [k35].
Language code list
Abkhazian:
Afar:
Afrikaans:
Albanian:
Ameharic:
Arabic:
Armenian:
Assamese:
Aymara:
Azerbaijani:
Bashkir:
Basque:
Bengali, Bangla:
Bhutani:
Bihari:
Breton:
Bulgarian:
Burmese:
Byelorussian:
Cambodian:
Catalan:
58
RQTV0134
6566
6565
6570
8381
6577
6582
7289
6583
6589
6590
6665
6985
6678
6890
6672
6682
6671
7789
6669
7577
6765
Chinese:
Corsican:
Croatian:
Czech:
Danish:
Dutch:
English:
Esperanto:
Estonian:
Faroese:
Fiji:
Finnish:
French:
Frisian:
Galician:
Georgian:
German:
Greek:
Greenlandic:
Guarani:
Gujarati:
9072
6779
7282
6783
6865
7876
6978
6979
6984
7079
7074
7073
7082
7089
7176
7565
6869
6976
7576
7178
7185
Hausa:
Hebrew:
Hindi:
Hungarian:
Icelandic:
Indonesian:
Interlingua:
Irish:
Italian:
Japanese:
Javanese:
Kannada:
Kashmiri:
Kazakh:
Kirghiz:
Korean:
Kurdish:
Laotian:
Latin:
Latvian, Lettish:
Lingala:
7265
7387
7273
7285
7383
7378
7365
7165
7384
7465
7487
7578
7583
7575
7589
7579
7585
7679
7665
7686
7678
Lithuanian:
7684
Macedonian:
7775
Malagasy:
7771
Malay:
7783
Malayalam:
7776
Maltese:
7784
Maori:
7773
Marathi:
7782
Moldavian:
7779
Mongolian:
7778
Nauru:
7865
Nepali:
7869
Norwegian:
7879
Oriya:
7982
Pashto, Pushto: 8083
Persian:
7065
Polish:
8076
Portuguese:
8084
Punjabi:
8065
Quechua:
8185
Rhaeto-Romance: 8277
Romanian:
Russian:
Samoan:
Sanskrit:
Scots Gaelic:
Serbian:
Serbo-Croatian:
Shona:
Sindhi:
Singhalese:
Slovak:
Slovenian:
Somali:
Spanish:
Sundanese:
Swahili:
Swedish:
Tagalog:
Tajik:
Tamil:
Tatar:
8279
8285
8377
8365
7168
8382
8372
8378
8368
8373
8375
8376
8379
6983
8385
8387
8386
8476
8471
8465
8484
Telugu:
Thai:
Tibetan:
Tigrinya:
Tonga:
Turkish:
Turkmen:
Twi:
Ukrainian:
Urdu:
Uzbek:
Vietnamese:
Volapük:
Welsh:
Wolof:
Xhosa:
Yiddish:
Yoruba:
Zulu:
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
M6VP&PC.book 59 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
On the unit’s display
H, F
(“” stands for a number.)
SET 
(“” stands for a number.)
HARD ERR
NoREAD
PLEASE WAIT
(“PLEASE” and “WAIT” are
alternately displayed.)
PROG FULL
(“PROG” and “FULL” are
alternately displayed.)
UNSUPPORT
(“UNSUP” and “PORT” are
alternately displayed.)
UNFORMAT
(“UNFOR” and “MAT” are
alternately displayed.)
U59
U61
U88
U99
Page
≥An error has occurred. The number following “H” or “F” depends on the status of the unit. Check the
items in the “Error messages” section and the “Troubleshooting guide”. If the service number still
does not disappear after the check, follow the Reset procedure described below.
Reset procedure: (“The unit is on but cannot be operated.” l 62)
≥If the service numbers fail to clear, note the service numbers and contact a qualified service person.
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.
≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was
purchased.
≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.
≥You have used a lens cleaner and it has finished. Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] to eject the disc.
≥Displayed when the unit is started. This is not a malfunction.
≥The unit is carrying out its recovery process. You cannot operate the unit while “PLEASE WAIT” is
displayed.
≥There are already 16 scheduled recording programs. Delete unnecessary scheduled recording
programs.
–
–
19
–
6, 9
22
–
–
29
≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on.
7
≥You have inserted a new DVD-RW/+R/+R DL/+RW or a DVD-RAM/DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)
recorded on other equipment.
54
≥The unit is very warm.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message
disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the
rear of the unit.
≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is
carrying out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not
broken. Wait until the message disappears.
≥There was something unusual detected with the disc while recording, playing or transferring
(copying), there was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit
is carrying out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not
broken. Wait until the message disappears.
≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I, POWER] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
Now press [Í/I, POWER] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
–
On the TV
Changing the unit’s settings/Messages
Messages
–
61
–
Page
Cannot finish recording
completely.
≥The program was copy-protected.
≥The disc may be full.
≥There are already 99 recorded titles ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 recorded titles).
–
–
–
Cannot play.
≥You inserted an incompatible disc (Discs recorded in PAL video, etc.).
–
Cannot record on the disc.
≥The disc may be dirty or scratched.
9
Unable to format.
Please check the disc.
Cannot record. The number
of titles has exceeded the
maximum limit.
38, 52,
≥Create space by erasing any unwanted titles. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]
[Even if you erase recorded content from the DVD-R or +R, there is no increase in disc space. Available
53
recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases when the last recorded title is
deleted. (The recording space may increase slightly when other titles are deleted.)]
≥Use a new disc.
–
Error has occurred. Please
press ENTER.
≥Press [ENTER] to start recovery process. You cannot operate the unit while it is recovering
(“SELF CHECK” appears on the unit’s display).
No disc
≥You haven’t inserted a disc. Correctly insert a disc that the unit can play.
≥The disc is upside down. If it is a single-sided disc, insert it so the label is facing up.
6, 9, 22
22
No VHS cassette
≥A video cassette is not inserted when recording programs. Insert a video cassette with an accidental
erasure prevention tab.
10, 22
Cannot record. Disc is full.
≥The VHS plays back while recording on DVD. You can watch the VHS playback by connect to the
Now recording on DVD.
To watch the VHS playback,
DVD/VHS COMMON terminals.
connect a TV to DVD/VHS
COMMON OUT terminal at the
back of the unit, and select the
appropriate input on the TV.
–
14
Please change the disc.
≥There may be a problem with the disc. Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to remove it and
check it for scratches or dirt. (The unit turns off automatically after you open the tray.)
Please set the clock.
≥The clock is not set when recording programs or setting the scheduled recording. Set the clock.
The VHS cassette is
protected.
≥A video cassette without the accidental erasure prevention tab is inserted when recording programs.
Use a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.
10
This is a non-recordable disc. ≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalized DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW.
This disc is not formatted
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW. Format the disc with the unit.
properly.
–
≥The operation is prohibited by the unit, disc or cassette.
9
17, 20
54
30
59
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 60 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Frequently asked questions
Set up
Page
≥DVD-Video:
You can play DVD-Video multi channel surround by digitally connecting an amplifier equipped with a
Dolby Digital and a DTS decoder.
≥DVD-Audio:
This unit plays DVD-Audio in 2 channels. You cannot play multi channel surround sound.
15
Can the headphones and
speakers be directly
connected to the unit?
≥You cannot directly connect to the unit. Connect through the amplifier etc.
15
The TV has both S VIDEO IN
terminal and COMPONENT
VIDEO IN terminals. Which
terminal should I connect
with?
≥We recommend the COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminal. Component signal outputs the color
difference signals (PB/PR) and luminance signal (Y) separately in order to achieve high fidelity in
reproducing colors. If the TV is compatible with progressive output, a high quality picture can be
output because the unit’s component video output terminal outputs a progressive output signal.
15
Is my TV progressive output
compatible?
≥All Panasonic TVs that have 480p input terminals are compatible. Consult the manufacturer if you
have another brand of TV.
–
What equipment is
necessary to play multi
channel surround sound?
Disc
Page
Can I play DVD-Video, DVD- ≥You can play them if the video standard is NTSC.
Audio and Video CDs bought ≥However, you cannot play DVD-Video if its region number does not include “1” or “ALL”.
in another country?
≥The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a standard. You cannot play discs
that do not have a region number.
Please tell me about DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R,
+R DL and +RW
compatibility with the unit.
≥The unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW,
and plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format).
≥The unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible discs.
≥After recording but before finalizing +R, +R DL discs
- You may not be able to play and record discs on this unit after recording them on other Panasonic
products or other manufacturer’s equipment.
- You may not be able to play and record discs on other equipment after recording them on this unit.
After finalizing the disc, however, you will be able to play it on any DVD-Video compatible player.
6, 7
Please tell me about CD-R
and CD-RW compatibility
with the unit.
≥This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the following standards:
CD-DA, Video CD, MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF). Close the session or finalize the disc after
recording. This unit can recognize up to 99 folders (groups) and 999 files (tracks) on a disc with MP3
or still pictures (JPEG/TIFF).
≥You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with the unit.
7, 32,
33
–
6
–
7
Page
≥Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy protected; therefore, recording is usually
not possible.
–
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD- ≥You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players after finalizing the disc on this unit. It is
RW (DVD-Video format), +R,
not necessary to finalize +RW. However, depending on the condition of the recording, the quality of
+R DL and +RW recorded on
the disc and capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible. To enable play on other DVD
the unit be played on other
players, please use “Create DVD Top Menu” in the DVD management menu.
equipment?
55
Can I record from a
commercially purchased
video cassette or DVD?
Can I record digital audio
signals using the unit?
≥You cannot record digital signals. The digital audio terminals on the unit are for output only.
(The audio recorded from a digital video camcorder using the DV automatic recording function, for
example, is recorded digitally.)
–
Can a digital audio signal
from the unit be recorded to
other equipment?
≥You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the “Digital Audio Output”
settings to the following from the Setup menu.
- PCM Down Conversion “On”
- Dolby Digital “PCM”
- DTS “PCM”
However, only
- As long as digital recording from the disc is permitted.
- As long as the recording equipment is compatible with 48 kHz of sampling frequency.
≥You cannot record MP3 signals.
57
≥With DVD-RAM, you can, and the audio recorded also changes. Just press [AUDIO].
≥With DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW you cannot. Change
before recording with “Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)” in the Setup menu.
25
57
Can I switch to SAP during
recording?
RQTV0134
–
Cover
Can a DVD-Video that does
not have a region number be
played?
Recording
60
–
–
M6VP&PC.book 61 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the remedies indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, refer to the “Customer Services Directory” on page 69 if you reside in the U.S.A., or refer to “Product information” on
page 66 if you reside in Canada. In other areas, consult your dealer.
The following do not indicate a problem with the unit:
≥Regular disc rotating sound.
≥Poor reception due to atmospheric condition.
≥Image disturbance during search.
≥Periodic interruptions to reception due to satellite broadcasting breaks.
≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a Panasonic disc.)
≥The unit freezes due to the activation of one of its safety devices. (Press and hold [Í/I, POWER] on the main unit for 10 seconds.)
Power
Page
No power
≥Insert the AC power supply cord securely into a known active AC outlet.
13
The unit switches to the
standby mode.
≥This is a power saving feature. Change “Off Timer” in the “Setup” menu, if you would prefer.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I, POWER] on the main unit to turn the unit
on.
56
–
Displays
Page
The display is dim.
≥Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu.
“12:00A” is flashing on the
unit’s display.
≥Set the clock.
The recording time display,
the transfer (copying)
process display and the
displayed recording time of
MP3 are different from the
actual time.
≥Times shown may disagree with actual times.
≥In DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL the remaining capacity does not increase even if titles are
deleted.
≥Available recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases when the last
recorded title is deleted. (The recording space may increase slightly when other titles are deleted.)
≥If you repeat recording or editing about 200 times or more, the remaining capacity of the DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL is reduced and then recording or editing may be disabled. (For the second
layer on DVD-R DL and +R DL, this happens after about 60 times.)
≥The time during fast forward and rewind, or the process during transfer (copy) may not be displayed
accurately.
–
–
Compared to the actual
recorded time, the elapsed
time displayed is less.
≥The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at 29.97 frames (equal to
0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight difference between the time displayed and the
actual elapsed time (e.g.,actual one-hour elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes
56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.
–
“U88” is displayed and the
disc cannot be ejected.
≥The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following to eject the disc.
(1) Press [Í/I, POWER] on the main unit to switch to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I, POWER] on the main unit for about 10
seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
(2) While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH, W] on the main unit at the same time for about
5 seconds. Remove the disc.
–
58
17, 20
Frequently asked questions/Troubleshooting guide
Troubleshooting guide
–
–
–
61
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 62 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Troubleshooting guide
Operation
Page
≥Change manufacturer code. Some TVs cannot be operated even if you change the code.
≥Press [TV/VIDEO] to change the input mode to “TV”.
19
26
Cannot operate the DVD.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select DVD drive when operating DVD.
11
Cannot operate the VHS.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select VHS drive when operating VHS.
11
The remote control doesn’t
work.
≥The remote control code is wrong. Change to the correct code.
≥The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.
≥Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the main unit.
≥Remove obstacles between the remote control and main unit.
≥Colored glass may abstruct the signal reception/transmission.
≥Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject to sunlight exposure.
≥It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after changing the batteries.
≥It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries.
19
9
9
–
–
–
9
9
The unit is on but cannot be
operated.
≥Some operations are prohibited by the disc.
≥The unit is warm (“U59” appears on the unit’s display). Wait until “U59” disappears.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
(1) Press [Í/I, POWER] on the main unit to switch to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I, POWER] on the main unit for about 10
seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
Alternatively, disconnect the AC power supply cord, wait for about 1 minute, then reconnect it.
(2) Press [Í/I, POWER] on the main unit to turn the unit on.
–
–
–
Cannot eject a disc.
≥The unit is recording
≥The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, hold down [∫] and [CH, W] on the main unit
simultaneously for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.
–
–
Startup is slow
≥Make sure that “Quick Start” is set to “On”.
Even if “Quick Start” is set to “On”, startup is slow if the clock is not set, there was a power failure or
the AC plug has just been connected.
≥A few dozen seconds after turning on the unit, you can play a disc or start recording to discs other
than DVD-RAM.
56
Cannot operate the TV.
Takes time to read DVD-RAM ≥It may take time to read a disc if it is being used for the first time in this unit or it has not been used
for a long time.
62
RQTV0134
–
–
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Picture
Page
TV reception worsens after
connecting the unit.
≥This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment. It can
be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers.
–
The images from the unit do
not appear on the TV.
≥Make sure that the TV is connected to the VIDEO OUT terminal, S VIDEO OUT terminal or
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals on the unit.
≥Make sure that the TV’s input setting (e.g., VIDEO 1) is correct.
≥The TV isn’t compatible with progressive signals. Press and hold [∫] and [“ DVD] on the main unit at
the same time for about 5 seconds. The setting will change to interlace.
13–15
Picture is distorted.
–
–
Status messages do not
appear.
≥Select “Automatic” in “Status Messages” in the Setup menu.
58
The blue background does
not appear.
≥Select “On” in “Blue Background” in the Setup menu.
58
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture
expands left and right.
≥Use the TV to change the aspect. If your TV does not have that function, set “Progressive” in the
Video menu to “Off”.
≥Check the settings for “TV Type”, “4:3 TV Settings for DVD-Video”, or “4:3 TV Settings for DVDRAM” in the Setup menu.
37
There is a lot of after-image
when playing video.
≥Set “DNR” in the Video menu to “Off”.
37
When playing DVD-Video
using progressive output,
one part of the picture
momentarily appears to be
doubled up.
≥Set “Progressive” in the Video menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the editing method or
material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.
37
Screen size is wrong.
There is no apparent change ≥The effect cannot be seen with certain types of video.
in picture quality when
adjusted with the Video menu
in the on-screen menus.
Sound
Troubleshooting guide
M6VP&PC.book 63 ページ
58
–
Page
No sound.
Low volume.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired
audio type.
≥Check the connections and “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input mode on the amplifier if
you have connected one.
≥Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.
≥Set “V. Surround Sound” in the Audio menu to “Off” in the following cases.
- When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs.
- When playing MTS broadcast titles.
15, 57
Cannot switch audio.
≥You cannot change the audio type when a DVD-R, a DVD-R DL, a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), a
+R, a +R DL or a +RW is in the disc tray.
≥You cannot change the audio type when playing a DVD-R, a DVD-R DL, a DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), a +R, a +R DL or a +RW. (You can select “Main” or “Secondary Audio Program (SAP)” in
“Multi-channel TV sound (MTS)” in the Setup menu before recording.)
≥You have used a digital connection. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using audio cables
(analog connection).
≥There are discs whose audio cannot be changed because of how the disc was created.
–
25, 31
37
57
15, 57
–
63
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 64 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Troubleshooting guide
Recording, Scheduled recording, Transfer (Copying), External input
Cannot record.
Scheduled recording does
not work properly.
6
54
53
6, 68
38, 52
55
–
–
–
–
29
17, 20
–
≥If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while “Quick Start” is set to “On”, you
cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.
56
The scheduled recording
program remains even after
recording finishes.
≥The scheduled recording program remains if set to daily or weekly.
29
A part or whole of a recorded ≥If the power shuts down or the plug is disconnected from the household AC outlet while recording or
title has been lost.
editing, the program may be lost or the disc may become unusable. We cannot offer any guarantee
regarding lost titles or discs. You will have to format the disc ([RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc.
–
≥The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to “PROTECT” or the disc is protected with “DVD
Management”.
≥Some video tapes on the market (including rental videos) are copy-protected to prevent illegal
reproductions. Copy-protected video tapes cannot be properly recorded.
≥You cannot use the transfer (copying) function when the FUNCTIONS window, the Scheduled
Recording List screen, etc. are displayed.
53
≥A video cassette without the accidental erasure prevention tab is inserted. Use a video cassette with
an accidental erasure prevention tab.
≥Some DVDs on the market (including rental DVD) are copy-protected to prevent illegal
reproductions. Copy-protected DVDs cannot be properly recorded.
≥You cannot use the transfer (copying) function when the FUNCTIONS window, the Scheduled
Recording List screen, etc. are displayed.
10
The sound level after editing ≥The sound level on DVD and VHS may not match depending on the disc. When the sound level in a
is not equal on DVD and on
particular part of the sound source is soft or loud, the sound may be recorded loudly or softly on a
VHS.
video tape.
–
Stripe-shaped black noise is
recorded.
≥The device in playback is interfering with the TV because the device is too close to the TV. Move the
device away from the TV.
–
Cannot record video or
sound from the external
device.
≥The external device is not correctly connected.
≥The proper external input channel (IN1, IN2 or DV) is not selected.
50
50
The DV automatic recording
function does not work.
≥If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the connections and DV
equipment settings.
≥You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on the television.
≥Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in the DV equipment are
not successive.
≥Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may not operate properly.
≥You can only record audio/video images on a DV tape.
50
Cannot transfer (copy) DVD
to VHS.
RQTV0134
≥The scheduled recording program is incorrect or different scheduled recording times overlap.
Correct the program.
≥The clock is not correct. Set the clock.
≥Scheduled recording will not be activated during formatting, transfer (copying) and other such
operations which should not be interrupted when they are being carried out.
Page
Scheduled recording does
not stop even when
[∫, STOP] is pressed.
Cannot transfer (copy) VHS
to DVD.
64
≥You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the unit can
record onto.
≥The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to “PROTECT” or the disc is protected with “DVD
Management”.
≥Some programs have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded (CPRM).
≥The disc is full or nearly full. Delete unneeded titles or use another disc.
≥You cannot record on finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or
DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format) discs.
≥If you repeatedly insert discs or turn the unit on and off about 50 times or more, the recording or
editing of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW may be disabled.
≥A DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW recorded on the unit may not
be recordable on other Panasonic DVD recorders.
≥The material you are trying to record is copy-protected.
≥Scheduled recording will not be activated when in editing or transfer (copy). Scheduled recording will
begin after the editing/transfer (copy) is finished.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Play
Play fails to start even when
[1, PLAY] is pressed.
Play starts but then stops
immediately.
Page
≥Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.
≥The disc is dirty.
≥You tried to play a blank disc or a disc that is unplayable on the unit.
≥You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalized on the equipment used for recording.
≥When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8H) mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that
are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use EP (6H) mode.
≥You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.
Audio and video momentarily ≥This occurs between playlist chapters.
pause.
≥This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
DVD-Video is not played.
≥Some DVD-Video cannot be played when you change the ratings level.
Alternative sound track and ≥Multiple languages are not recorded on the disc.
subtitles cannot be selected. ≥You may have to use the disc’s own menus to select languages.
22
9
7
–
57
–
–
30
56
–
30
No subtitles.
≥When progressive output is on, closed captions cannot be displayed.
≥Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
≥Set “Subtitle” in the Disc menu to “On”.
–
–
36
Angle cannot be changed.
≥This function depends on software availability. Angles can only be changed during scenes where
different angles are recorded.
–
You have forgotten your
ratings password.
≥With the tray open, keep pressing [¥, REC] and [1] on the main unit simultaneously for about 5 or
more seconds.
–
Quick View does not work.
≥This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.
≥This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.
–
–
The resume play function
does not work.
≥Memorized positions are canceled when the unit is turned off or when the tray is opened.
The memorized position on the playlist is also canceled when the playlist and title are edited.
–
Edit
Page
Cannot format.
≥The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
≥You tried formatting a disc that is not compatible with the unit.
9
7
Cannot create chapters.
≥The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off or remove the disc.
The information is not written if there is an interruption in the power before this.
≥These operations are not possible with still pictures.
≥You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point before a start
point.
–
Cannot mark the start point
or the end point during
“Shorten Title” operation.
–
–
Cannot delete chapters.
≥When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer.
40
The available recording time
doesn’t increase even after
deleting recordings on the
disc.
≥Available recording space on the DVD-R, the DVD-R DL, the +R or the +R DL does not increase
even after deleting previously recorded titles.
≥Available recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases when the last
recorded title is deleted. (The recording space may increase slightly when other titles are deleted.)
–
Cannot create a playlist.
≥You cannot select all the chapters in a title at once as the source of playlist edition if the title also
includes still pictures. Select them individually.
–
VHS Picture
–
Page
OSD messages do not
appear.
≥Go to Setup and select “Automatic” in “Status Messages”.
Press [STATUS] to show the on-screen messages constantly.
The blue back appears
during play.
≥You are playing a blank or poor quality part of the tape.
≥You can damage the unit if you play dirty or damaged tapes and this can cause the blue back to
appear. Consult your dealer.
VHS Sound
Cannot hear the desired
audio type.
35, 58
–
–
Page
≥Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.
There is noise when playing a ≥Adjust the tracking.
video tape.
≥The tape is old or damaged.
VHS Recording, scheduled recording
31
35
–
Page
“1” flashes when I try to
start recording.
Cannot record.
≥A video cassette is not inserted. Insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.
≥The erasure prevention tab has been removed. Cover the hole with adhesive tape.
22
10
Cannot record TV program.
≥The desired channel is not selected. Select the desired TV program.
–
VHS Play
Cannot play.
Troubleshooting guide
M6VP&PC.book 65 ページ
Page
≥Tapes recorded under a TV system other than NTSC (PAL, SECAM, etc.) cannot be played.
The playback screen flickers. ≥The video head is dirty.
≥The tape is too old or damaged.
–
–
–
65
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 66 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Product Service
1. Damage requiring service — The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel if:
(a)The AC power supply cord or AC adaptor has been damaged; or
(b)Objects or liquids have gotten into the unit; or
(c)The unit has been exposed to rain; or
(d)The unit does not operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or
(e)The unit has been dropped or the cabinet damaged.
2. Servicing — Do not attempt to service the unit beyond that described in these operating instructions. Refer all other servicing to authorized
servicing personnel.
3. Replacement parts — When parts need replacing ensure the servicer uses parts specified by the manufacturer or parts that have the same
characteristics as the original parts. Unauthorized substitutes may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.
4. Safety check — After repairs or service, ask the servicer to perform safety checks to confirm that the unit is in proper working condition.
Product information
For product information or assistance with product operation:
In the U.S.A., refer to “Customer Services Directory” on page (l 69).
In Canada, contact the Panasonic Canada Inc. Customer Care Centre at 1-800-561-5505, or visit the website (www.panasonic.ca), or an
authorized Servicentre closest to you.
The model number and serial number of this product can be
found on either the back or the bottom of the unit.
Please note them in the space provided below and keep for
future reference.
MODEL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
66
RQTV0134
DMR-ES35V
User memo:
DATE OF PURCHASE
DEALER NAME
DEALER ADDRESS
TELEPHONE NUMBER
M6VP&PC.book 67 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Power supply:
Power consumption:
Standby mode: (Display ON)
(Display OFF)
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Approx. 29 W
Approx. 3.2 W
Approx. 3.0 W
Recordable discs:
DVD-RAM: Ver. 2.0
Ver. 2.1/3X-SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 1.0
Ver. 2.2/5X-SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 2.0
DVD-R:
for General Ver. 2.0
for General Ver. 2.0/4X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 1.0
for General Ver. 2.x/8X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 3.0
for General Ver. 2.x/16X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 6.0
for DL Ver. 3.0
for DL Ver. 3.x/4X-SPEED DVD-R for DL Revision 1.0
DVD-RW: Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.1/2X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 1.0
Ver. 1.2/4X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 2.0
+R:
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.2
for DL Ver. 1.0
+RW:
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.2/4X-SPEED
Recording system:
DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R:
DVD-Video format
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
DVD-Video format
DVD-RW: DVD-Video format
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
Recording time:
Max. 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)
XP: Approx. 1 hour
SP: Approx. 2 hours
LP: Approx. 4 hours
EP: Approx. 6 hours or 8 hours
Video system:
Recording system: (for DVD)
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
Input:
LINE (pin jack)k2
S connectork2
Output: (for DVD PRIORITY)
LINE (pin jack)k2
S connectork2
Component video output: (for DVD PRIORITY)
Y, PB, PR k1
(480i/480p)
Y:
C:
1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
0.286 Vp-p; 75 ≠
Y:
C:
1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
0.286 Vp-p; 75 ≠
Y:
PB:
PR :
1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
0.7 Vp-p; 75 ≠
0.7 Vp-p; 75 ≠
Audio system:
Recording system: (for DVD)
Dolby Digital (2 ch)
Linear PCM (XP mode 2 ch)
Analog Input:
LINE (pin jack)k2
Reference input: 309 mVrms
FS: 2 Vrms (1 kHz, 0 dB)
Input impedance: 22 k≠
Analog Output: (for DVD PRIORITY)
LINE (pin jack)k2
Reference output: 309 mVrms
FS: 2 Vrms (1 kHz, 0 dB)
Output impedance: 1 k≠
(Load impedance: 10 k≠)
Number of channels: (for DVD)
Recording: 2 channels
Playback: 2 channels
Number of track: (for VHS)
HiFi: 2 track
Normal: 1 track
Digital Output: (for DVD PRIORITY)
Digital audio optical output connectork1
(PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS)
Playable discs:
DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R:
DVD-Video format
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
DVD-Video format
DVD-RW: DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD
CD-R/CD-RW (CD-DA, Video CD, MP3, JPEG)
VHS
Recording format:
Heads:
DV Input:
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 Pink1
Optical pick-up:
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
Regional Code:
#1
Clock unit:
Quartz-controlled 12-hour digital display
LASER Specification:
Class 1 LASER Product
Wave Length:
780 nm (CDs)
662 nm (DVDs)
Laser Power:
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the
safety protection
Operating temperature range:
5 oC t o 40 oC (41 oF t o 104 oF )
Television system:
TV system:
NTSC system, 525 lines, 60 fields
Antenna reception input:
TV Channel:
VHF: 2 ch to 13 ch
UHF: 14 ch to 69 ch
CATV Channel: 5A & A-5 ch to EEE ch
Quick Start for Recording (Quick Start : ON)
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording on DVD-RAM°
° From the power off state, recording on DVD-RAM starts about 1 second
after first pressing the Power button and then sequentially pressing the
REC button (Quick Start Mode).
Product Service/Specifications
Specifications
VHS Video Cassette System Standard with FM audio
4 Helical Scan Heads for Video
2 Helical Scan Heads for FM audio
1 Fixed Head for Normal audio
Tape speed/Recording time:
SP: 33.35 mm/s, 120 min (with T-120 cassette)
EP: 11.12 mm/s, 360 min (with T-120 cassette)
FF/REW time:
FF/REW: Approx. 60 s (with T-120 cassette)
Jet REW: Approx. 43 s (with T-120 cassette)
Operating humidity range:
10% t o 80% RH (no condensation)
Dimensions:
Approx. 430 mm (W)k84 mm (H)k343 mm (D)
[Approx. 1615/16q (W)k35/16q (H)k137/8q (D)]
Mass:
Approx. 5.4 kg (Approx. 11.9 lbs)
Note
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Mass and dimensions shown are approximate.
67
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 68 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Glossary
Bitstream
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
This is a signal compressed and converted into digital form. It is
converted back to a multi-channel audio signal, e.g., 5.1-channel, by
a decoder.
An audio compression method that compresses audio to
approximately one-tenth of its size without any considerable loss of
audio quality. You can play MP3s you have recorded onto CD-R and
CD-RW.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This
is called decoding.
Pan & Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they will
be viewed on a widescreen TV (16:9 aspect ratio), so images often
don’t fit regular TVs (4:3 aspect ratio). 2 styles of picture,
“Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Pan & Scan:
The sides are cut off so the picture fills the screen.
Letterbox:
Black bands appear at the top and bottom of the
picture so the picture itself appears in an aspect
ratio of 16:9.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your TV’s
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing. If this is the case, this
unit can only output the front two channels.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs. Dynamic range compression
means reducing the gap between the loudest and softest sounds.
This means you can hear dialog clearly at low volume.
Film and Video
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. The unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
≥Film is 24 or 30 frames per second, with motion picture film
generally being 24 frames per second.
≥Video is 60 fields per second (2 fields making up 1 frame).
Finalize
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,
etc. possible on equipment that can play such media. You can
finalize DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on the unit. After finalizing, the disc becomes play-only and
you can no longer record or edit. However, finalized DVD-RW can
be formatted to become recordable.
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format)
and +RW on the unit.
Formatting irrevocably erases all contents on the disc.
Frame and field
Frame refers to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your TV. Each frame consists of 2 fields.
Frame
Field
=
Field
+
≥A frame still shows 2 fields, so there may be some blurring
between them, but picture quality is generally better.
≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding color still pictures. If
you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc., the
data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering
the degree of compression.
68
RQTV0134
Playback control (PBC)
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus displayed on the screen.
(The unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)
Progressive/Interlace
NTSC, the video signal standard, has 480 interlaced (i) scan lines,
whereas progressive scanning uses twice the number of scan lines.
This is called 480p.
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.
Your TV must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.
Protection
You can prevent accidental erasure by setting writing protection or
erasure protection.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.
TIFF (Tag Image File Format)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding color still pictures, a
common format for storing high quality images on digital cameras
and other devices.
M6VP&PC.book 69 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company,
Division of Panasonic Corporation of North America
One Panasonic Way Secaucus, New Jersey 07094
Glossary/Limited Warranty (ONLY FOR U.S.A.)
Limited Warranty (ONLY FOR U.S.A.)
Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc.
Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5
San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00985
Panasonic DVD Recorder
Limited Warranty
Limited Warranty Coverage
If your product does not work properly because of a defect in materials or workmanship,
Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company or Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc. (collectively
referred to as “the warrantor”) will, for the length of the period indicated on the chart below,
which starts with the date of original purchase (“warranty period”), at its option either (a)
repair your product with new or refurbished parts, or (b) replace it with a new or a
refurbished product. The decision to repair or replace will be made by the warrantor.
Parts
Labor
DVD Recorder
Product or Part Name
One (1) Year
One (1) Year
Rechargeable Batteries,
DVD-RAM Disc (in
exchange for defective item)
Ten (10) Days
Not Applicable
During the “Labor” warranty period there will be no charge for labor. During the “Parts”
warranty period, there will be no charge for parts. You must carry-in or mail-in your product
during the warranty period. If non-rechargeable batteries are included, they are not
warranted. This warranty only applies to products purchased and serviced in the United
States or Puerto Rico. This warranty is extended only to the original purchaser of a new
product which was not sold “as is”. A purchase receipt or other proof of the original
purchase date is required for warranty service.
Carry-In or Mail-In Service
For Carry-In or Mail-In Service in the United States call 1-800-211-PANA (7262) or visit
Panasonic Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com
For assistance in Puerto Rico call Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc. (787)-750-4300 or fax
(787)-768-2910.
Limited Warranty Limits And Exclusions
This warranty ONLY COVERS failures due to defects in materials or workmanship, and
DOES NOT COVER normal wear and tear or cosmetic damage. The warranty ALSO DOES
NOT COVER damages which occurred in shipment, or failures which are caused by
products not supplied by the warrantor, or failures which result from accidents, misuse,
abuse, neglect, mishandling, misapplication, alteration, faulty installation, set-up
adjustments, misadjustment of consumer controls, improper maintenance, power line
surge, lightning damage, modification, or commercial use (such as in a hotel, office,
restaurant, or other business), rental use of the product, service by anyone other than a
Factory Servicenter or other Authorized Servicer, or damage that is attributable to acts of
God.
THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS LISTED UNDER
“LIMITED WARRANTY COVERAGE”. THE WARRANTOR IS NOT LIABLE
FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM
THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF
THIS WARRANTY. (As examples, this excludes damages for lost time, travel
to and from the servicer, loss of media or images, data or other recorded
content. The items listed are not exclusive, but are for illustration only.) ALL
EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY
OF MERCHANTABILITY, ARE LIMITED TO THE PERIOD OF THE LIMITED
WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts,
so the exclusions may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other
rights which vary from state to state. If a problem with this product develops
during or after the warranty period, you may contact your dealer or
Servicenter. If the problem is not handled to your satisfaction, then write to the
warrantor’s Consumer Affairs Department at the addresses listed for the
warrantor.
PARTS AND SERVICE WHICH ARE NOT COVERED BY THIS
LIMITED WARRANTY ARE YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
Customer Services Directory
Obtain Product Information and Operating Assistance; locate your nearest Dealer or Servicenter; purchase Parts and
Accessories; or make Customer Service and Literature requests by visiting our Web Site at:
http://www.panasonic.com/consumersupport
or, contact us via the web at:
http://www.panasonic.com/contactinfo
You may also contact us directly at:
1-800-211-PANA (7262),
Monday-Friday 9 am-9 pm; Saturday-Sunday 10 am-7 pm, EST.
For hearing or speech impaired TTY users, TTY : 1-877-833-8855
Accessory Purchases
Purchase Parts, Accessories and Instruction Books online for all Panasonic Products by visiting our Web Site at:
http://www.pasc.panasonic.com
or, send your request by E-mail to:
npcparts@us.panasonic.com
You may also contact us directly at:
1-800-332-5368 (Phone) 1-800-237-9080 (Fax Only) (Monday – Friday 9 am to 8 pm, EST.)
Panasonic Services Company
20421 84th Avenue South, Kent, WA 98032
(We Accept Visa, MasterCard, Discover Card, American Express, and Personal Checks)
For hearing or speech impaired TTY users, TTY : 1-866-605-1277
Service in Puerto Rico
Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc.
Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5, San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00985
Phone (787)750-4300, Fax (787)768-2910
F1003
69
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 70 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Limited Warranty (ONLY FOR CANADA)
Panasonic Canada Inc.
PANASONIC PRODUCT – LIMITED WARRANTY
Panasonic Canada Inc. warrants this product to be free from defects in material and workmanship and agrees to remedy any such defect for a
period as stated below from the date of original purchase.
Panasonic DVD Recorder One (1) year, parts and labour
In-home Service will be carried out only to locations accessible by roads and within 50 km of an authorized Panasonic service facility.
LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS
This warranty does not apply to products purchased outside Canada or to any product which has been improperly installed, subjected to usage
for which the product was not designed, misused or abused, damaged during shipping, or which has been altered or repaired in any way that
affects the reliability or detracts from the performance, nor does it cover any product which is used commercially. Dry cell batteries are also
excluded from coverage under this warranty.
This warranty is extended to the original end user purchaser only. A purchase receipt or other proof of date of original purchase is required before
warranty service is performed.
THIS EXPRESS, LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT WILL PANASONIC CANADA INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
In certain instances, some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or the exclusion of implied
warranties, so the above limitations and exclusions may not be applicable.
WARRANTY SERVICE
FOR PRODUCT OPERATION ASSISTANCE, please contact:
Our Customer Care Centre:
Telephone #:
1-800 #:
Fax #:
Email link:
(905) 624-5505
1-800-561-5505
(905) 238-2360
“Contact Us” on www.panasonic.ca
FOR PRODUCT REPAIRS, please locate your nearest Authorized Servicentre at www.panasonic.ca :
Link : “ServicentresTM locator” under “Customer support”
Panasonic Factory Service:
Richmond, British Columbia
Panasonic Canada Inc.
12111 Riverside Way
Richmond, BC V6W 1K8
Tel: (604) 278-4211
Fax: (604) 278-5627
Mississauga, Ontario
Panasonic Canada Inc.
5770 Ambler Drive
Mississauga, ON L4W 2T3
Tel: (905) 624-8447
Fax: (905) 238-2418
IF YOU SHIP THE PRODUCT TO A SERVICENTRE
Carefully pack and send prepaid, adequately insured and preferably in the original carton.
Include details of the defect claimed, and proof of date of original purchase.
70
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 71 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
≥Antes de hacer la conexión, apague todos los equipos y lea los
manuales de instrucciones apropiados.
≥El equipo periférico y los cables opcionales se venden por
separado a menos que se indique lo contrario.
Para su referencia
≥Las conexiones del equipo descritas son ejemplos.
≥El equipo periférico y los cables opcionales se venden por
separado a menos que se indique lo contrario.
∫ No conecte la unidad mediante una videograbadora
Los sistemas de protección de los derechos de autor afectarán las
señales de video enviadas mediante una videograbadora y la
imagen no se mostrará bien en el televisor.
Televisor
Televisor
La unidad
Videograbadora
Videograbadora
La unidad
∫ Cuando la unidad no vaya a utilizarse durante mucho
tiempo
Para ahorrar energía, desenchufe la unidad de la toma de CA. Esta
unidad consume una pequeña cantidad de energía aunque se
encuentre apagada (8 W aproximadamente).
Conexión con un televisor
∫ Conexión (con cable de audio/vídeo)
Conecte por orden numérico de 1 a 4.
∫ Conexión (sin cable de audio/vídeo)
No necesita conectar “3”.
≥Después de esta conexión, ajuste el canal de salida RF “OFF”
(l 72), y luego pulse el botón TV/VIDEO del mando a distancia
del televisor para seleccionar el modo de entrada AV al terminal
del televisor conectado. Puede mirar un vídeo desde esta unidad
en su televisor.
La unidad envía una señal al televisor a través de un cable coaxial
de 75 ≠ en el canal 3 o 4. Es posible ver una imagen de vídeo en su
televisor de la misma manera que la que ve en las emisiones
televisivas.
≥Después de esta conexión, ajuste el canal de salida RF “CH3” o
“CH4” (l 72).
Limited Warranty (ONLY FOR CANADA)/Instalación básica
Instalación básica
Televisión
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
R
L
Cable de pared o
señal de antena
VHF/UHF
RF IN
Rojo Blanco Amarillo
Cable de audio/vídeo
(incluido)
Panel trasero de esta unidad
3
2
75 h
cable
coaxial
(incluido)
75 h
cable
coaxial
1
Rojo Blanco Amarillo
A la toma doméstica
de CA
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
A la
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
Y
PB
PR
RF
IN
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
R-AUDIO-L
A la RF IN
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
RF
OUT
R-AUDIO-L
DVD
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PRIORITY OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VHF/UHF
A la RF OUT
Cable de alimentación de CA (Incluido)
Conecte solamente después de haber finalizado todas las demás conexiones.
4
Salida DVD y salida DVD/VHS
La unidad tiene terminales de salida DVD/VHS COMMON y los de
salida DVD PRIORITY.
Salida DVD/VHS COMMON
Para gozar de una más alta calidad de
la imagen
∫ Conexión al terminal S VIDEO IN
Terminal S VIDEO OUT
Y
PB
PR
Los terminales S VIDEO OUT logran una imagen más viva que la del
terminal VIDEO OUT. (El resultado real depende del televisor.)
Tras terminar “Conexión con un televisor”, conecte el cable S VIDEO.
De costumbre puede ver una imagen desde el terminal INPUT2.
Cuando quiere reproducir un VHS mientras graba en DVD, cambie al
terminal INPUT1.
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
v
R-AUDIO-L
DVD
VIDEO
S VIDEO
PRIORITY OUT
R-AUD
Salida DVD PRIORITY
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT
≥Para los terminales de salida DVD/VHS COMMON, pueden
lograrse sea las señales DVD sea las VHS.
DVD PRIORITY OUT
≥Salvo mientras que graba o va haciendo una grabación
programada, con el terminal de salida DVD PRIORITY puede
también reproducir una cinta en el DVD.
∫ Conexión a los terminales COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Terminal COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Estos terminales pueden usarse para el entrelazado o la salida
progresiva y proporcionan una imagen más clara que la del terminal
S VIDEO OUT.
Tras terminar “Conexión con un televisor”, conecte el cable
COMPONENT VIDEO.
De costumbre puede ver una imagen desde el terminal
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT. Cuando quiere reproducir un VHS
mientras graba en DVD, cambie al terminal INPUT1.
≥Conecte a los terminales del mismo color.
71
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 72 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Instalación básica
[6] Pulse [3, 4] para seleccionar “Sintonizador” o
“Entrada” y pulse [ENTER].
DVD/VHS
POWER
DRIVE
SELECT
Botones
numéricos
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
VOLUME
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
RESET
CH
CH, W, X
[7] Pulse [ENTER] para iniciar la sintonización
automática por Plug-in.
≥La unidad procede con el ajuste automático del reloj. La hora
aparece cuando esté terminado dicho ajuste.
ADD/DLT
CH
∫ Cuando aparece la pantalla “No se ha encontrado
ningún canal” o la de “Ajus. automát. del reloj no
acabado”
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
SKIP/INDEX
∫
Cuando no ajusta los canales en esta unidad, seleccione
“Entrada”. La unidad entonces muestra la pantalla “Ajuste
manual del reloj”.
Ajuste manualmente el reloj.
POWER
Í
STOP
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
Después de apagar la unidad, confirme lo siguiente y vuelva a
configurar.
≥Compruebe si el cable de antena está firmemente conectado al
terminal RF IN.
≥Si no ajusta los canales en esta unidad, seleccione “Entrada”
en el paso 6.
Pantalla “Ajus. automát. del reloj no acabado.”
Pulse [ENTER] y ajuste manualmente el reloj.
FF
PLAY
;
CM SKIP
REC MODE
µ
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
TIONS
FU N C
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
CREATE
RETURN
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS F Rec
[8] Pulse [ENTER].
∫ Si el reloj tiene una hora en adelante o retrasada con
respecto a la hora real
Seleccione “j1” o “i1” en “Ajustar del huso horario” en el menú
CONFIGURACIÓN.
Seleccionar el tipo de televisor
Sintonización automática por Plug-in
Preparación
≥Encienda el televisor y seleccione la entrada de vídeo apropiada a
las conexiones de la unidad (Ejemplo: entrada AV, CH3 o CH4).
≥Si conecta la unidad a través de una caja para televisor de cable o
un receptor de satélite, sintonice su PBS local para que funcione el
ajuste automático del reloj.
Si no hay ningún PBS local, ajuste el reloj manualmente.
[1] Pulse [Í, DVD/VHS POWER].
[2] Pulse [CH, W, X] para
seleccionar un número
de canal de salida RF.
Conexión
(sin cable de audio/vídeo):
Seleccione “CH3” o “CH4” que
visualiza la pantalla a la derecha.
Conexión
(con cable de audio/vídeo):
Seleccione “OFF”
Select Language
Seleccione el idioma
Sélection de langue
English
Español
Français
Press ENTER
Pulse ENTER
Appuyer sur ENTER
Durante la parada
Pulse [FUNCTIONS].
[2] Seleccione “Otras funciones” con [3, 4] y
pulse [ENTER].
[3] Seleccione “CONFIGURACIÓN” con [3, 4] y
pulse [ENTER].
[4] Seleccione “Pantalla TV” con [3, 4] y pulse
[2, 1].
[5] Seleccione “Tipo TV” [3, 4] y pulse [ENTER].
≥Aspecto 4:3/Aspecto 16:9:
4:3
[3] Utilice [3, 4] para seleccionar el idioma y pulse
[ENTER].
[4] Pulse [3, 4] para seleccionar “TV de 4:3” o “TV
ancho de 16:9” y pulse [ENTER].
[5] Pulse [3, 4] para seleccionar “Encendido” o
“Apagado” y pulse [ENTER].
Si activa la función “Accionamiento rápido”, seleccione
“Encendido”.
Acerca de la función “Accionamiento rápido”
Si ajusta Accionamiento rápido en activado, puede iniciar a
grabar al DVD-RAM alrededor de 1 segundo después de que
haya pulsado [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] para encender la
unidad.
Cuando haya seleccionado “Encendido”, tiene lugar lo
siguiente.
≥El consumo de energía en espera aumenta por el hecho de
que se suministra energía a los mandos de la unidad.
RQTV0134
[1]
16:9
El visualizador de la unidad
El visualizador de la unidad
Cada vez que pulsa el botón:
CH 3 (Ajustes predeterminados) ,-. CH4 ,-. OFF
^-------------------------------------------------------------------J
72
Usted no tiene que cambiar el ajuste cuando está conectado a un
televisor de aspecto estándar de 4:3 que no sea compatible con la
salida progresiva.
Aspecto estándar de 4:3 Televisor de aspecto panorámico 16:9
≥480p/480i:
Seleccione “480p” si el televisor es compatible con la salida
progresiva.
[6] Utilice [3, 4] para seleccionar el elemento y
pulse [ENTER].
∫ Para volver a la pantalla anterior
Pulse [RETURN].
∫ Para salir de la pantalla
Pulse [RETURN].
M6VP&PC.book 73 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Insertar discos
Procedimientos de grabación
[1] Pulse [<, OPEN/CLOSE] en la unidad principal
para abrir la bandeja.
≥Puede insertar un disco de cartucho o sin cartucho.
[2] Pulse [<, OPEN/CLOSE] en la unidad principal
para cerrar la bandeja.
≥Si inserta un DVD-RAM con la lengüeta de protección contra
la escritura ajustada en “PROTECT”, la reproducción inicia
automáticamente.
Nota
≥Un disco de doble cara tiene que colocarse con la cara que quiere
grabar/reproducir mirando hacia abajo.
≥No es posible grabar continuamente desde una cara a la otra en
un disco de dos caras. Tendrá que expulsar el disco y darlo la
vuelta.
≥Cuando utilice un DVD-RAM de 8 cm (3q) o un DVD-R de 8 cm
(3q), quite el disco del cartucho.
Disco sin cartucho
Disco en cartucho
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Insértelo con la cara impresa hacia arriba.
(2) Inserte completamente hasta que haga un ruido seco.
(3) Insértelo con la etiqueta arriba y la flecha hacia adentro.
Insertar un videocasete
La superficie a través
de la que puede ver el
rollo de la cinta tiene
que estar de cara
hacia arriba,
Inserte un
videocasete.
≥La unidad se
enciende
automáticamente.
∫ Para expulsar un videocasete
≥Puede expulsar el videocasete aun cuando la unidad esté en el
modo de espera. Ésta vuelve a la espera una vez que lo haya
expulsado.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [VHS]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
≥Puede grabar hasta 99 títulos en un disco.
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Puede grabar hasta 49 títulos en un disco.
≥No es posible grabar emisiones digitales que permiten “Grabación
sólo una vez” en el DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL,
+RW o discos DVD-RAM de 8 cm (3q). Utilice un CPRM
compatible DVD-RAM
≥La grabación se hará en el espacio vacío del disco. Los datos no
se escribirán encima de otros.
≥Si ya no queda espacio en el disco de grabación, será menester
borrar los títulos innecesarios o utilizar un nuevo disco.
Cuando graba en un DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (Formato
DVD-Vídeo), +R, +R DL o +RW
≥Cuando graba emisiones MTS
- Si no conecta una caja para televisor de cable
Seleccione “Main” o “SAP” en “Seleccionar MTS” en el menú
CONFIGURACIÓN.
- Si conecta una caja para televisor de cable
Seleccione “Main” o “SAP” en el TV box de cable.
≥La relación de aspecto de la imagen grabada será 4:3.
≥A fin de reproducir DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (Formato
Vídeo DVD) +R, +R DL grabado usando esta unidad en otra
fuente de reproducción, antes tiene que finalizar el disco.
Preparación
≥Cancele la protección. [RAM]
≥Seleccione la unidad que ve el canal (por ejemplo la entrada AV)
en el televisor.
≥Seleccione un tipo de audio que quiere grabar. (l 74)
[1] Pulse [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] para encender la
unidad.
[2] Pulse [DRIVE SELECT] para seleccionar la
unidad en la que quiere grabar (DVD o VHS).
[3] Inserte un disco.
≥Cuando usa un DVD-RAM por la primera vez con esta unidad,
formatéelo para garantizar una esmerada grabación.
o
Inserte un videocasete que tenga intacta la
lengüeta de protección contra el borrado
accidental.
[4] Pulse [CH, W, X] para seleccionar el canal.
≥Para seleccionar con los botones numéricos:
Modo de antena (Ondas
hertzianas)
Ej.,
“5”:
[0] )[5]
“15”:
[1] )[5]
Para la unidad principal
≥Pulse [<, EJECT] en la unidad principal.
Para el mando a distancia
Pulse [DRIVE SELECT] para seleccionar el lado VHS y luego pulse
y mantenga pulsado [∫, STOP] durante 3 segundos o más.
Sólo la principal o SAP pueden grabarse para las emisiones
MTS, cuando graba al DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL,
+RW
Si no conecta una caja de cable
Seleccione “Main” o “SAP” en “Seleccionar MTS” del menú
CONFIGURACIÓN.
Si conecta una caja de cable
Seleccione “Main” o “SAP” en la caja de cable.
Modo televisor de cable
(Cable)
Ej., “5”: [0] )[0] )[5]
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]
“115”: [1] )[1] )[5]
[5] Pulse [REC MODE] para seleccionar el modo de
grabación.
Antes de grabar
≥[+RW] El menú del título creado se borra cuando graba en el disco.
Vuelva a crear el menú del título usando “Crear menú superior
DVD.” en Gestión del DVD.
Instalación básica/Grabación de programas de televisión
Grabación de programas de televisión
[6]
[DVD]: XP, SP, LP o EP
[VHS]: SP, EP o VP
Pulse [¥, REC] para empezar a grabar.
≥Durante la grabación no se puede cambiar el canal ni el modo de
grabación. Puede cambiarlos mientras que la grabación está en
pausa, pero el material se graba como un título distinto.
∫ Para hacer una pausa en la grabación
Pulse [;, PAUSE]. (Pulse de nuevo para reiniciar la grabación.)
≥El título no se divide en títulos distintos. [DVD]
≥También puede pulsar [¥, REC] para reiniciar la grabación.
∫ Para detener la grabación
Pulse [∫, STOP].
≥Grabado como 1 título hasta el punto donde termina. [DVD]
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
La unidad tarda unos 30 segundos en completar la información
para administrar la grabación después de terminar esta última.
73
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 74 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Grabación de programas de televisión
∫ Modos de grabación (VHS)
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
DRIVE
SELECT
∫
Modo de grabación
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
CH, W, X
VOLUME
TV/VIDEO
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
ADD/DLT
CH
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
REW
STOP
PAUSE
≥Para lograr una capacidad de grabación más larga, seleccione “EP” o “VP”.
≥Si la calidad de la imagen es importante para usted o por si desea
almacenar la cinta durante un largo período, seleccione “SP”.
≥La unidad puede reproducir cintas grabadas en el modo LP en
otro equipo (“LP” se enciende en el visualizador de la unidad).
CH
RESET
modo VP:
FF
1
PLAY
CM SKIP
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
µ
AUDIO
A
REC
3, 4, 2, 1
ENTER
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
RETURN
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS
VCR/TV
F Rec
STATUS
F Rec
∫ Modos de grabación y tiempos de
grabación aproximados (DVD)
Dependiendo del contenido que está siendo grabado, los tiempos
de grabación pueden ser inferiores a los indicados.
DVD-RAM
1
DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R, +RW
(4,7 GB)
Un solo lado
(4,7 GB)
Dos lados°
(9,4 GB)
XP (Alta calidad)
1 hora
2 horas
1 hora
SP (Normal)
2 horas
4 horas
2 horas
LP (Larga duración)
4 horas
8 horas
4 horas
EP
(Duración extralarga)
8 horas
(6 horas°2)
16 horas
(12 horas°2)
8 horas
(6 horas°2)
8 horas
máximo
8 horas máximo
para una cara
8 horas
máximo
FR
(Grabación flexible)
3
DVD-R DL, +R DL° (8,5 GB)
Primera capa (L0)
XP (Alta calidad)
Segunda capa (L1)
55 minutos
50 minutos
SP (Normal)
1 hora 50 minutos
1 hora 40 minutos
LP (Larga duración)
3 horas 40 minutos
3 horas 20 minutos
EP
7 horas 25 minutos
(Duración extralarga) (5 horas 30 minutos°2)
6 horas 50 minutos
(5 horas 15 minutos°2)
FR
(Grabación flexible)
6 horas 50 minutos
máximo
7 horas 25 minutos
máximo
Esta unidad usa una grabación de velocidad variable de
transferencia de bits (VBR) que varía la cantidad de datos grabados
para adaptar las imágenes, así que los tiempos reales de grabación
mostrados por la unidad resultarán diferentes (la diferencia será
sobre todo evidente con el DVD-R DL y +R DL).
Para estar seguro, utilice un disco en el que queda bastante tiempo.
°1 No es posible grabar o reproducir continuamente desde una
cara a la otra en un disco de dos caras.
°2 Cuando “Tiempo de grab. en el mode EP” ha sido ajustado a
“EP - Repr. ón ampliada (6H)” en el menú CONFIGURACIÓN.
La calidad del sonido es mejor cuando usa “EP - Repr. ón
ampliada (6H)” que cuando usa “EP - Repr. ón ampliada (8H)”.
°3 No es posible grabar continuamente de la primera capa a la segunda.
Nota
Cuando grabe en un DVD-RAM utilizando el modo EP (8H), puede
que no sea posible reproducir ese disco en reproductores DVD
compatibles con DVD-RAM. En este caso, utilice el modo EP (6H).
74
RQTV0134
SP: Puede grabar lo largo mostrado en la cinta.
EP: 3 veces lo largo del modo SP.
VP: 5 veces lo largo del modo SP.
FR (modo de grabación flexible):
≥Puede ajustar el modo FR cuando transfiere (copia) o programa
grabaciones programadas.
≥Una cinta grabada por la unidad en el modo VP no puede
reproducirse por otras videograbadoras. Se recomienda que
se la distingue entre las demás cintas
escribiendo “VP” en su etiqueta, etc.
≥Cuando reproduce cintas grabadas con el modo VP, necesita
más tiempo para que funcione el alineamiento automático y, con
unas cintas, podría no funcionar en absoluto. Haga el
alineamiento manualmente si fuera éste el caso.
Nota
No puede reproducir una grabación VP en otro equipo.
∫ Cuando se visualiza la pantalla de
confirmación del formato
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Cuando inserta un disco nuevo y
uno grabado en un ordenador u
otro equipo, podría aparecer una
pantalla de confirmación del
formato. Formatee el disco para
usarlo. Sin embargo, todo el
contenido grabado se va a borrar.
Pulse [2, 1] para
seleccionar “Si” y pulse
[ENTER].
Formatear
Este disco no está formateado
correctamente.
Formatear el disco en Gestión DVD.
Si
No
ENTER
∫ Para formatear un disco
Son necesarios muchos pasos para formatear un disco.
∫ Cuando quita un disco grabado
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Cuando pulsa [<, OPEN/CLOSE] en la unidad principal mientras
que va a parar:
Aparece la siguiente pantalla
Para reproducir en otros lectores DVD ( Finalizar )
cuando no haya procesado el disco
La finalización necesita para permitir reproducir
el disco en otros lectores DVD compatibles. Una ves
para reproducir en otro equipo.
finalizados, los titulos no pueden agregarse al
disco. Durará alrededor de ٤ minutos. ¿Iniciar?
Cuando finaliza el disco
Pulse [¥, REC].
No puede detener este proceso una
vez que lo haya iniciado.
Pulse “REC” para iniciar
a finalizar.
Pulse OPEN/CLOSE para diferir la
final.ón. El disco sólo puede reproducirse
en esta unidad. Puede finalizarlo después.
Para especificar un tiempo para detener
la grabación
–Grabación de un toque
Mientras graba
Pulse [¥, REC] para seleccionar el tiempo de grabación.
≥En la unidad principal, pulse [¥, REC].
El visualizador de la unidad
Cada vez que pulsa el botón:
Contador (cancelar) # OFF 0:30 # OFF 1:00 # OFF 1:30
^------- OFF 4:00 ! OFF 3:00 ! OFF 2:00 !----------}
Seleccionar el audio para grabar
[RAM]
Pulse [AUDIO].
Estéreo # SAP # Mono
^----------------------------}
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Reproducir DVD mientras graba VHS
Puede reproducir discos mientras graba VHS. La grabación no
quedará afectada.
≥Reproducción DVD (l 76)
Para su referencia
≥No puede grabar en discos mientras graba VHS.
Grabación flexible
(Grabación que cabe en el espacio restante del
disco)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
La unidad computa una velocidad de grabación que permite
adaptarla a la hora establecida (dentro del tiempo que queda en el
disco) con la mejor calidad de la imagen.
Reproducir VHS mientras graba DVD
La utilización de “GRABACIÓN FLEX.” es conveniente en
este tipo de situaciones.
≥Cuando el espacio libre del disco haga que la selección del
modo de grabación apropiado sea más difícil
≥Cuando usted quiere grabar un programa largo con la mejor
calidad de imagen posible
Ej., grabación de un programa de 90 minutos en un disco
Si selecciona el modo XP, el programa no cabrá en un disco.
Puede reproducir cintas mientras graba DVD. La grabación no
quedará afectada.
≥Reproducción VHS (l 78)
Para su referencia
≥No puede grabar en cintas mientras graba DVD.
Ver el televisor mientras graba
Preparación
≥Conexión (sin cable de audio/vídeo)
- Asegúrese de que el indicador TV esté encendido en el
visualizador de la unidad. Por si no está encendido, pulse [VCR/
TV] para encenderlo.
≥Conexión (con cable de audio/vídeo)
- Pulse [TV/VIDEO] para cambiar el modo de entrada a “TV”.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
Para su referencia
≥Puede también hacerlo si la unidad está realizando una grabación
programada.
≥La grabación no queda afectada.
[RAM]
Preparación
≥Seleccione el lado DVD pulsando [DRIVE SELECT].
Consejo
≥El sonido no se produce durante el avance rápido.
∫ Reproducción desde el comienzo del título
mientras está grabando–Reproducción de
persecución
Puede iniciar a reproducir desde el comienzo del título mientras que
sigue grabándolo.
Mientras hace una grabación normal o una programada
Pulse [1, PLAY].
≥La reproducción inicia mientras que procede la grabación.
Para su referencia
≥La reproducción no puede tener comienzo hasta que hayan
pasado al menos 2 segundos desde el inicio de la grabación.
∫ Reproducción de un título previamente
grabado mientras graba–Grabación y
reproducción simultáneas
Puede reproducir un título grabado anteriormente mientras que graba otro título.
[1]
Mientras hace una grabación normal o una programada
Pulse [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[2] Pulse [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar un título y
pulse [ENTER].
Es necesario un segundo disco para
30 minutos del programa.
Si selecciona el modo SP, el programa no cabrá en un disco.
Pulse [CH, W, X] del televisor para seleccionar el
canal TV deseado.
Reproducción mientras usted está
grabando
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
Grabación de programas de televisión
M6VP&PC.book 75 ページ
Sin embargo, quedarán unos 30 minutos
de espacio libre en el disco
Si selecciona “FLEXIBLE RECORDING”, el
programa cabrá perfectamente en un disco.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
Preparación
≥Seleccione el lado DVD pulsando [DRIVE SELECT].
≥Seleccione el canal para grabar.
[1]
Durante la parada
Pulse [F Rec].
[2] Pulse [2, 1] para seleccionar “Hora” y “Min.” y
pulse [3, 4] para ajustar el tiempo de grabación.
[3]
≥También puede poner el tiempo de grabación con los
botones numéricos.
≥No puede grabar durante más de 8 horas.
Cuando quiere iniciar la grabación
Pulse [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar “Empezar” y
pulse [ENTER].
≥Empieza la grabación.
Para salir de la pantalla sin grabar
Pulse [RETURN].
Para detener la grabación al rato de empezar
Pulse [∫, STOP].
Para mostrar el tiempo restante
Pulse [STATUS].
Para su referencia
≥Durante una grabación flexible, en el visualizador de la unidad se
encienden todos los indicadores del modo de grabación.
≥No es posible cambiar el canal o el modo de grabación mientras
que la grabación flexible está en pausa.
≥ La reproducción inicia mientras que procede la grabación.
∫ Para salir de la pantalla DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Pulse [DIRECTNAVIGATOR].
Para su referencia
≥Durante la grabación y la reproducción simultáneas, no puede editar ni
borrar títulos con el Direct Navigator ni listas de reproducción.
≥Aunque inicie a reproducir mientras que la unidad está en espera
de la grabación programada, la grabación inicia al llegar la hora
establecida.
75
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 76 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Reproducir discos
∫ Cuando aparece una pantalla de menú en el
televisor
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
Í
DRIVE
SELECT
Botones
numéricos
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
RESET
:, 9
∫
CH
ADD/DLT
CH
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
REW
SKIP/INDEX
STOP
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
TIME SLIP
FF
PLAY
CM SKIP
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SCHEDULE
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
AUDIO
A
REC
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
[VCD]
Pulse los botones numéricos para seleccionar un elemento.
Ej.:
“5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Pulse [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar un elemento y pulse
[ENTER].
≥Algunas veces puede usar los botones numéricos para
seleccionar un elemento.
VOLUME
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS
F Rec
6, 5
1
;
CM SKIP
3, 4, 2, 1
2;, ;1
ENTER
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
Preparación
≥Encienda el televisor y seleccione la apropiada entrada de
vídeo para adaptar las conexiones a la unidad.
≥Seleccione el lado DVD pulsando [DRIVE SELECT].
Reproducir discos
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
[1] Pulse [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] para encender la
unidad.
[2] Inserte un disco. (l 73)
[3] Pulse [1, PLAY].
≥La bandeja del disco se cierra e inicia la reproducción
(La unidad necesita algún tiempo para leer el disco antes de
iniciar la reproducción).
≥La reproducción empieza desde el título grabado más
recientemente.
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
≥La reproducción empieza desde el comienzo del disco.
[DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]
∫ Para detener la reproducción
Pulse [∫, STOP].
La posición de detención se memoriza.
Función de reanudación de la reproducción
Pulse [1, PLAY] para reiniciar la reproducción desde esta posición.
≥[VCD] Según el disco, puede no ser eficaz la función de
reanudación de la reproducción.
≥El punto de detención se elimina cuando:
- Pulsa [∫, STOP] muchas veces.
- Abre la bandeja.
- [DVD-A] [VCD] [CD] Apaga la unidad.
≥Podría aparecer el salva-pantalla a la derecha
Salva-pantalla
cuando detiene la reproducción. Vuelva a pulsar
[∫, STOP] y usted puede usar el sintonizador de
la unidad para ver el televisor.
[DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]
∫ Para poner en pausa la reproducción
Pulse [;, PAUSE]. (Pulse de nuevo para reiniciar la reproducción.)
76
RQTV0134
Otros botones usados para obrar en los menús
Lea las instrucciones del disco para más detalles sobre el
funcionamiento.
Nota
≥ Si aparece “
operación.
” en el televisor, la unidad o el disco prohíben la
Seleccionar títulos grabados para
reproducir
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[1] Pulse [DIRECTNAVIGATOR].
[2] Utilice [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar el título que
quiere ver y pulse [ENTER].
≥Inicia la reproducción.
≥Puede también seleccionar títulos insertando un número de 2
cifras usando los botones numéricos.
Ej.:
“5”: [0] )[5]
“15”: [1] )[5]
≥Si inserta un número más grande que el número total de
títulos, se selecciona el último título.
∫ Para eliminar la lista de títulos
Pulse [RETURN].
Para su referencia
≥Iconos de la pantalla Direct Navigator
: Título protegido
: Protegido contra copia así que él no se pudo grabar.
t: No puede reproducir
¥: En grabación
: Título con restricción “grabación de una sola vez”
Quick View (Reproducción t1,3)
[RAM]
Puede ser aumentada la velocidad de reproducción sin distorsionar
el audio.
Durante la reproducción
Mantenga pulsado [1, PLAY].
DVD-RAM
Reproducir
DVD-RAM
Repr. x1.3
∫ Para volver a la reproducción normal
Pulse [1, PLAY].
Avance rápido y rebobinado —
BÚSQUEDA
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
Durante la reproducción
Pulse [6, SLOW/SEARCH]
SLOW/SEARCH].
Ej., [RAM]
o [5 ,
DVD-RAM
• • • •
t2
≥Hay 5 velocidades de búsqueda. Aumenta la
velocidad cada vez que se pulsa. ([+R] [+RW] hasta 3 velocidades)
≥Pulse [1, PLAY] para reiniciar la reproducción.
Para su referencia
≥El sonido sólo se produce al primer nivel de avance rápido. En el
caso de DVD Audio (salvo las porciones de imágenes en
movimiento), CD y MP3, él se produce en todos los niveles.
≥Dependiendo del disco puede que la búsqueda resulte imposible.
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Salto
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
Durante la reproducción o mientras está en pausa
Pulse [:, SKIP] o [9, SKIP].
≥Cada pulsación aumenta el número de saltos.
Reproducción de cámara lenta
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-A] (Partes de imagen móvil solamente) [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Durante la pausa
Pulse [6, SLOW/SEARCH]
o [5, SLOW/
SEARCH].
≥Cuando la reproducción de cámara lenta continúa durante
5 minutos, ésta se detiene automáticamente (excluyendo [DVD-A]
[DVD-V] [VCD]).
≥Hay 5 velocidades de reproducción. Su velocidad aumenta a
medida que se pulse.
≥Pulse [1, PLAY] para reiniciar la reproducción.
≥[VCD] Dirección de avance ([5, SLOW/SEARCH]) solamente.
Vista de encuadre en encuadre
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-A] (Partes de imagen móvil solamente) [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Durante la pausa
Pulse [2;] ([2]) o [;1] ([1]).
≥A medida que se pulse se visualiza el encuadre siguiente o el
anterior.
≥Mantenga pulsado para cambiar en orden avance o retroceso.
≥Pulse [1, PLAY] para reiniciar la reproducción.
≥[VCD] Dirección de avance ([;1], [1]) solamente.
Reproducción directa
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-A] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
Puede reproducir desde el título, el capítulo o la pista que
selecciona.
Durante la reproducción
Pulse los botones numéricos para seleccionar un
elemento.
Ej.:
“5”:
“15”:
[0] )[5]
[1] )[5]
[CD] (disco MP3, JPEG y TIFF solamente)
“5”: [0] )[0] )[5]
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]
Salto del tiempo especificado — Time
Slip
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[1] Pulse [TIME SLIP].
[2] Pulse [3, 4] para seleccionar el tiempo y pulse
[ENTER].
Reproducir discos
M6VP&PC.book 77 ページ
La reproducción salta al tiempo especificado.
≥Cada vez que pulsa [3, 4] el tiempo aumenta [3] o disminuye
[4] en intervalos de 1 minuto. (Mantenga pulsado para cambiar a
intervalos de 10 minutos.)
Cambio del audio durante la
reproducción
Pulse [AUDIO] para seleccionar el tipo de audio.
≥Según es el medio de grabación puede seleccionar el tipo de
audio.
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Estéreo# Mono L# Mono R
^--------------------------------------}
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [Cuando reproduce una emisión SAP grabada en un
DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (Formato de grabación de vídeo DVD)]
Principal () SAP
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]
Esto le permite cambiar los elementos como el número de canal de
audio y el idioma de la pista de sonido.
Pista de audio
1 ENG
Î Digital 3/2.1ch
Ej., es el inglés el idioma seleccionado. [DVD-V]
[VHS]
Estéreo > Mono L > Mono R > Sin visualización (pista de audio normal)
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------}
Nota
≥Si no puede cambiar el tipo de audio cuando para la conexión sólo
ha usado un cable óptico digital, ajuste “Dolby Digital” a “PCM”.
Alternativamente, puede conectar a un amplificador con un cable
de Audio/Vídeo y cambiar la entrada en el amplificador para
adaptar la conexión.
[DVD-A]
Puede especificarse un número de grupo mientras que está
visualizado el salva-pantalla (l 76).
Ej.:
“5”: [5]
≥Esto sólo funciona durante la parada con algunos discos (el salvapantalla se visualiza).
≥Reproducir grupos adicionales
En unos discos caben grupos adicionales. Si después de
seleccionar un grupo aparece una pantalla de contraseña, escriba
la contraseña con los botones numéricos y pulse [ENTER]. Por lo
que respecta a la contraseña, se remite a la funda del disco, etc.
Salto CM
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Puede saltar aproximadamente 1 minuto con una presión.
Durante la reproducción
Pulse [CM SKIP].
Crear capítulos
[RAM]
Durante la reproducción
Pulse [CREATE CHAPTER].
≥Pulse [:, SKIP] o [9, SKIP] para saltar al comienzo de un
capítulo.
≥No puede activar esta función cuando está ejecutando la
transferencia (copia).
77
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 78 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Reproducción de un videocasete
DVD/VHS
POWER
POWER
Í
DRIVE
CH
SELECT TV/VIDEO
DRIVE
SELECT
TRACKING/V-LOCK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
RESET
∫
STOP
CH
ADD/DLT
CH
REW
PAUSE
TIME SLIP/ JET REW
TRACKING/
V-LOCK, r, s
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP/INDEX
FF
PLAY
CM SKIP
6, 5
1
;
SCHEDULE
ENTER
SUB MENU
AUDIO
A
REC
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
6JET REW
VOLUME
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER VCR/TV
B
REC MODE STATUS
F Rec
Avance rápido/Rebobinado
Durante la parada
Pulse [6] (atrás)/[5] (en avance).
Localización progresiva/Revisión
Durante la reproducción
Pulse o mantenga pulsado [6] (atrás)/[5] (en
avance).
≥Si mantiene pulsado estos botones, la normal reproducción reinicia
soltándolos.
≥Pulse [1, PLAY] para reiniciar la normal reproducción.
Búsqueda Jet
Durante la reproducción
Pulse dos veces [6] (atrás)/[5] (en avance).
Puede aumentar la velocidad de búsqueda de la
localización progresiva/revisión.
≥Pulse [1, PLAY] para reiniciar la normal reproducción.
≥Puede seleccionar la velocidad de búsqueda para ver la imagen grabada.
≥La imagen grabada en el modo EP o VP podría resultar distorsionada si
se reproduce a una velocidad de 35 veces. Puede tener lugar un
desplazamiento vertical. Esto no es un funcionamiento defectuoso, pero si
ocurre, cambie a una velocidad de 27 veces.
≥La imagen puede no ser de color o resultar distorsionada según sea el
televisor.
Lenta
Durante la reproducción
Pulse y mantenga pulsado [;, PAUSE] durante
2 segundos o más.
≥Pulse [1, PLAY] para reiniciar la normal reproducción.
Rebobinado Jet
78
RQTV0134
Para rebobinar a una más alta velocidad
Pulse [JET REW6].
En la pantalla del televisor se visualiza la indicación “J. REW” (salvo
cuando aparece la del tiempo que queda en la cinta).
≥Según sea la cinta o la condición de funcionamiento, la velocidad
de rebobinado podría cambiar algún tanto.
≥Cuando ésta esté rebobinada a su comienzo, el contador de la
cinta se repone a “0:00.00”.
≥Según sea la cinta, esta función podría no obrar.
[1] Pulse [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] para encender la
unidad.
[2] Seleccione el lado VHS pulsando
[DRIVE SELECT].
[3] Seleccione la unidad que ve el canal (por
ejemplo la entrada AV) en el televisor.
[4] Inserte una videograbadora. (l 73)
[5] Pulse [1, PLAY].
≥La reproducción inicia automáticamente al insertar un
videocasete en el que se haya quitado la lengüeta.
∫ Para hacer una pausa en la reproducción
Pulse [;, PAUSE]. (Pulse de nuevo para reiniciar la reproducción.)
∫ Para detener la reproducción
Pulse [∫, STOP].
Nota
≥Cuando la unidad está en espera, puede reproducirse el
videocasete insertado pulsando [1, PLAY].
≥Cuando la cinta llegue al fin, la unidad se rebobina automáticamente
hasta el comienzo. Esta función no obra durante la grabación
programada, el avance rápido y la grabación con parada especificada.
≥La búsqueda Jet, la localización progresiva, la revisión o la
reproducción lenta se cancelarán automáticamente a los
10 minutos en tanto que se pondrán en pausa a los 5 minutos.
≥Cuando ve una imagen fija o durante la reproducción lenta, la
imagen que aparece en el modo VP podría resultar distorsionada.
≥Cuando reproduce una cinta que fue grabada con otra
videograbadora, puede necesitar que se ajuste el alineamiento
(l debajo). En unos casos la calidad de la imagen podría resultar
aun inferior. Eso se debe a las restricciones del formato.
Reproducción Cuasi S-VHS (SQPB)
Es posible también reproducir cintas grabadas en el sistema S-VHS.
≥Según sea el tipo de cinta usada, podría ocurrir algún ruido de
imagen.
≥No es posible lograr enteramente la alta resolución de la que sea
capaz el S-VHS.
≥No es posible grabar en el sistema S-VHS con esta unidad.
Reproducción repetida
Durante la reproducción o la parada
Mantenga pulsado [1, PLAY]
durante 5 segundos
o más.
≥Al terminar el programa, la cinta se rebobina a su comienzo y vuelve a
reproducirlo (esto sólo funciona si hay al menos 5 segundos de espacio
vacío en el fin del programa). Éste se repite hasta que lo cancele.
∫ Para reiniciar la normal reproducción
Pulse [1, PLAY].
∫ Para detener la reproducción
Pulse [∫, STOP].
Ajustar la imagen de reproducción
De costumbre, la unidad hace los ajustes de alineamiento, pero
podría necesitar hacerlo manualmente si tiene lugar ruido en una
cinta grabada con otro equipo.
Durante la reproducción
Pulse [TRACKING/V-LOCK, r] o
[TRACKING/V-LOCK, s].
Repita hasta que desaparezca el ruido.
∫ Para volver al alineamiento automático
Pulse simultáneamente sea [TRACKING/V-LOCK, r] sea
[TRACKING/V-LOCK, s].
∫ Para sacar el ruido de una imagen en pausa
Inicie la reproducción lenta, luego ajuste el alineamiento.
Nota
≥Esta función no obra con unos modelos de televisor y cintas.
≥Puede ajustar también el alineamiento con [CH, W, X] en la unidad
principal.
M6VP&PC.book 79 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Angle ............................................................................................. 36
Antenna System........................................................................... 17
Audio
attributes ..................................................................................... 36
channel ....................................................................................... 36
language ..................................................................................... 57
playback...................................................................................... 30
receiving, recording..................................................................... 25
Auto Bilingual Choice.................................................................. 25
Auto SP/EP mode......................................................................... 29
Change Thumbnail................................................................. 39, 43
Channel
adding, deleting........................................................................... 17
audio ........................................................................................... 36
captions....................................................................................... 18
Set Channel Automatically.......................................................... 17
Chasing playback ........................................................................ 26
Cleaning
disc................................................................................................ 9
lens ............................................................................................... 3
main unit ....................................................................................... 3
video heads................................................................................. 10
Clock Settings .............................................................................. 20
CM Skip......................................................................................... 31
Connection
amplifier, system component ...................................................... 15
antenna ....................................................................................... 14
antenna, television ...................................................................... 13
cable box, satellite receiver......................................................... 14
DV input terminal ........................................................................ 50
external device............................................................................ 50
Copy (playlist) .............................................................................. 42
CPRM system ........................................................................... 6, 68
Create chapters...................................................................... 31, 43
Create playlists ............................................................................ 41
Delete
all titles ........................................................................................ 53
chapter ........................................................................................ 40
chapter in playlist ........................................................................ 43
playlist ......................................................................................... 42
title .............................................................................................. 38
Dialog Enhancer........................................................................... 37
Direct Navigator ........................................................................... 30
Divide Title.................................................................................... 39
DNR ............................................................................................... 37
DV automatic recording .............................................................. 50
DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, rR, ,rR DL, rRW...... 6
Enter Name
disc.............................................................................................. 53
operation ..................................................................................... 51
playlist ......................................................................................... 42
title ........................................................................................ 28, 39
Finalize.................................................................................... 55, 68
Flexible Recording....................................................................... 27
Format Disc .................................................................................. 54
FR (Flexible Recording Mode) .................................................... 24
FUNCTIONS window.................................................................... 37
GUI Transfer (Copying) ......................................................... 46, 48
Intact erasure prevention tab...................................................... 10
Jet Rewind .................................................................................... 34
JPEG ....................................................................................... 32, 68
Language
audio ........................................................................................... 57
code list....................................................................................... 58
on-screen .................................................................................... 58
soundtrack .................................................................................. 36
subtitle................................................................................... 36, 57
Menu
MP3............................................................................................. 32
on-screen .................................................................................... 36
Picture......................................................................................... 33
Setup........................................................................................... 56
Mode
recording ..................................................................................... 24
Still Mode .................................................................................... 57
MP3................................................................................................ 32
Noise reduction (NR)
DNR .............................................................................................37
Line-in NR....................................................................................37
One Touch Transfer (Copying) ..............................................45, 47
On-screen display.........................................................................35
PCM Down Conversion ................................................................57
Picture............................................................................................37
Playlist ...........................................................................................41
Progressive .................................................................15, 18, 37, 68
Properties
playlist..........................................................................................42
title ...............................................................................................38
Protection
cartridge.......................................................................................53
disc ..............................................................................................53
title ...............................................................................................39
Quick Start.................................................................................3, 56
Quick View.....................................................................................30
Ratings...........................................................................................56
Recording modes .........................................................................24
Remaining tape time.....................................................................35
Repeat play..............................................................................34, 36
Restore default settings...............................................................56
Resume play function ..................................................................30
Scheduled recording ....................................................................28
Setup menu ...................................................................................56
Shorten Titles................................................................................39
Simultaneous recording and play ...............................................26
Soundtrack ....................................................................................36
SQPB..............................................................................................34
Status messages ..........................................................................37
Subtitle.....................................................................................36, 57
Thumbnail......................................................................................39
TIFF ..........................................................................................32, 68
Time Slip........................................................................................31
Tracking.........................................................................................35
Transfer .........................................................................................37
Transfer (Copying)........................................................................44
TV Type..........................................................................................18
VHS settings..................................................................................58
VISS................................................................................................35
VP mode ........................................................................................24
V. Surround Sound .......................................................................37
Reproducción de un videocasete/Index
Index
79
RQTV0134
M6VP&PC.book 80 ページ
2006年2月6日 月曜日 午後3時20分
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
“DTS” and “DTS 2.0iDigital Out” are trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.
Apparatus Claims of U.S. Patent Nos. 4,631,603, 4,577,216, and
4,819,098, licensed for limited viewing uses only.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and
other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology
must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Panasonic Consumer Electronics
Company, Division of Panasonic
Corporation of North America
One Panasonic Way Secaucus,
New Jersey 07094
http://www.panasonic.com
Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc.
Panasonic Canada Inc.
Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5
San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina,
Puerto Rico 00985
5770 Ambler Drive
Mississauga, Ontario
L4W 2T3
www.panasonic.ca
RQTV0134-2
C 2006 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
F0106Ya1016
Download PDF

advertising